## Are you sure?

This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

**1 International Mathematics Olympiad 6
**

1.1 1

st

IMO, Romania, 1959 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1.2 2

nd

IMO, Romania, 1960 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.3 3

rd

IMO, Hungary, 1961 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

1.4 4

th

IMO, Czechoslovakia, 1962 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.5 5

th

IMO, Poland, 1963 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

1.6 6

th

IMO, USSR, 1964 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1.7 7

th

IMO, West Germany, 1965 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1.8 8

th

IMO, Bulgaria, 1966 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

1.9 9

th

IMO, Yugoslavia, 1967 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.10 10

th

IMO, USSR, 1968 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

1.11 11

th

IMO, Romania, 1969 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.12 12

th

IMO, Hungary, 1970 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.13 13

th

IMO, Czechoslovakia, 1971 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1

2 CONTENTS

1.14 14

th

IMO, USSR, 1972 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1.15 15

th

IMO, USSR, 1973 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

1.16 16

th

IMO, West Germany, 1974 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1.17 17

th

IMO, Bulgaria, 1975 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.18 18

th

IMO, Austria, 1976 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

1.19 19

th

IMO, Yugoslavia, 1977 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

1.20 20

th

IMO, Romania, 1978 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1.21 21

st

IMO, United Kingdom, 1979 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

1.22 22

nd

IMO, Washington, USA, 1981 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

1.23 23

rd

IMO, Budapest, Hungary, 1982 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

1.24 24

th

IMO, Paris, France, 1983 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

1.25 25

th

IMO, Prague, Czechoslovakia, 1984 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

1.26 26

th

IMO, Helsinki, Finland, 1985 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

1.27 27

th

IMO, Warsaw, Poland, 1986 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

1.28 28

th

IMO, Havana, Cuba , 1987 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

1.29 29

th

IMO, Camberra, Australia, 1988 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

1.30 30

th

IMO, Braunschweig, West Germany, 1989 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

1.31 31

st

IMO, Beijing, People’s Republic of China, 1990 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

1.32 32

nd

IMO, Sigtuna, Sweden, 1991 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

1.33 33

rd

IMO, Moscow, Russia, 1992 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

CONTENTS 3

1.34 34

th

IMO, Istambul, Turkey, 1993 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

1.35 35

th

IMO, Hong Kong, 1994 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

1.36 36

th

IMO, Toronto, Canada, 1995 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

1.37 37

th

IMO, Mumbai, India, 1996 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

1.38 38

th

IMO, Mar del Plata, Argentina, 1997 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

1.39 39

th

IMO, Taipei, Taiwan, 1998 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

1.40 40

th

IMO, Bucharest, Romania, 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

1.41 41

st

IMO, Taejon, South Korea, 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

1.42 42

nd

IMO, Washington DC, USA, 2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

1.43 43

rd

IMO, Glascow, United Kingdom, 2002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

1.44 44

th

IMO, Tokyo, Japan, 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

2 William Lowell Putnam Competition 50

2.1 46

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1985 . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2.2 47

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1986 . . . . . . . . . . . 52

2.3 48

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1987 . . . . . . . . . . . 54

2.4 49

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1988 . . . . . . . . . . . 56

2.5 50

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1989 . . . . . . . . . . . 58

2.6 51

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1990 . . . . . . . . . . . 60

2.7 52

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1991 . . . . . . . . . . . 62

2.8 53

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1992 . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4 CONTENTS

2.9 54

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1993 . . . . . . . . . . . 66

2.10 55

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1994 . . . . . . . . . . . 68

2.11 56

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1995 . . . . . . . . . . . 69

2.12 57

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1996 . . . . . . . . . . . 71

2.13 58

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1997 . . . . . . . . . . . 73

2.14 59

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1998 . . . . . . . . . . . 75

2.15 60

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . 76

2.16 61

st

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

2.17 62

nd

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 2001 . . . . . . . . . . . 80

2.18 63

rd

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 2002 . . . . . . . . . . . 81

3 Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiads 84

3.1 1

st

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1989 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

3.2 2

nd

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1990 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

3.3 3

rd

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1991 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

3.4 4

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1992 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

3.5 5

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1993 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

3.6 6

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1994 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

3.7 7

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1995 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

3.8 8

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1996 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

3.9 9

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1997 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

CONTENTS 5

3.10 10

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1998 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

3.11 11

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

3.12 12

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

3.13 13

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

3.14 14

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

3.15 15

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Chapter 1

International Mathematics Olympiad

1.1 1

st

IMO, Romania, 1959

1. Prove that the fraction

21n + 4

14n + 3

is irreductible for every natural number n

2. For what real values of x is

x +

√

2x −1 +

x −

√

2x −1 = A

given (a) A =

√

2, (b) A = 1, (c) A = 2, where only non-negative real numbers are

admitted for square roots?

3. Let a, b, c be real numbers. Consider the quadratic equation in cos x: a cos

2

x +

b cos x + c = 0. Using the numbers a, b and c, form a quadratic ecuation in cos 2x,

whose roots are the same as those of the original ecuation. Compare the ecuations

in cos x and cos 2x for a = 4, b = 2 and c = −1

4. Construct a right triangle with hypotenuse c such that the median drawn to the

hypotenuse is the geometric mean of the two legs of the triangle.

5. An arbitrary point M is selected in the interior of the segment AB. The squares

AMCD and MBEF are constructed on the same side of AB, sith the segments AM

and MB as their respective bases. The circles circumscribed abut these squares,

6

1.2. 2

ND

IMO, ROMANIA, 1960 7

with centers P and Q intersect at M and also at another point N. Let N

denote the

intersection of the straight lines AF and BC.

(a) Prove that the points N and N

coinside.

(b) Prove that the straight lines MN pass throught a ﬁxed point S independent of

the choice of M.

(c) Find the locus of the midpoints of the the segment PQ as M varies between A

and B.

6. Two planes, P and Q, intersect along the line p. The point A is given in the plane

P, and the point C in the plane Q; neither of these points lies on the straight line p.

Construct an isosceles trapezoid ABCD (with AB parallel to CD) in which a circle

can be inscribed, and with vertices B and D lying in the planes P and Q respectively.

1.2 2

nd

IMO, Romania, 1960

1. Determine all three-digit numbers N having the property that N is divisible by 11,

and

N

11

is equal to the sum of the squares of the digits of N.

2. For what values of the variable x does the following inequality hold?

4x

2

1 −

√

1 + 2x

2

< 2x + 9

3. In a given right triangle ´ABC, the hypotenuse BC, of lenght a, is dividen into n

equal parts (n an odd integer). Let α be the acute angle subtending, from A, that

segment which contains the middle point of the hypotenuse. Let h be the lenght of

the altitude to the hypotenuse of the triangle. Prove:

tan α =

4nh

(n

2

−1) a

4. Construct a triangle ´ABC, given h

a

, h

b

(the altitudes fron A and B) and m

a

, the

median from vertex A.

5. Consider the cube ABCDA

B

C

D

(whith face ABCD directly above face A

B

C

D

).

(a) Find the locus of the midpoints of segment XY , where X is any point of AC

and Y is any point of B

D

.

8 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

(b) Find the locus of points Z which lie on the segment XY of part (a) with ZY =

2XZ.

6. Considere a cone of revolution with an inscribed sphere tangent to the base of the

cone. A cylinder is circumscribed about this sphere so that one of its bases lies in

the base of the cone. Let V

1

be the volume of the cone and V

2

the volumen of the

cilinder.

(a) Prove that V

1

= V

2

.

(b) Find the smallest number k for which V

1

= kV

2

, for this case, construct the

angle subtended by a diameter of the base of the cone at the vertex of the cone.

7. An isosceles trapezoid with bases a and c, and altitude h is given.

(a) On the axis of symmetry of this trapezoid, ﬁnd all points P such that both legs

of the trapezoid subtended right angles at P.

(b) Calculate the distance of P from either base.

(c) Determine under what conditions such points P actually exist. (Discuss varius

case that might arise)

1.3 3

rd

IMO, Hungary, 1961

1. Solve the system of equations:

x +y +z = a

x

2

+y

2

+z

2

= b

2

xy = z

2

where a and b are constants. Give the conditions that a and b must satisfy so that

x, y, z (the solutions of the system) are distinct positive numbers.

2. Let a, b, c the sides of a triangle, and T its area. Prove: a

2

+ b

2

+ c

2

≥ 4

√

3T. In

what case does the equality hold?

3. Solve the equation cos

n

x −sin

n

x = 1, where n is a natural number.

4. Consider the triangle ´P

1

P

2

P

3

and a point P within the triangle. Lines PP

1

, PP

2

,

PP

3

intersect the opposite side in points Q

1

, Q

2

, Q

3

respectively. Prove that, of the

numbers

P

1

P

PQ

1

,

P

2

P

PQ

2

,

P

3

P

PQ

3

at least one is less than or equal to 2 and at least one is

grater than or equal to 2.

1.4. 4

TH

IMO, CZECHOSLOVAKIA, 1962 9

5. Construct triangle ´ABC if AC = b, AB = c and AMB = ω, where M is the

midpoint of the segment BC and ω < 90

◦

. Prove that a solution exists and only if

b tan

ω

2

≥ c < b. In what case does the equality hold?

6. Considere a plane ε and three non-collinear points A, B, C on the same side of ε;

suppose the plane determined by these three points is not parallel to ε. In plane a take

three arbitrary points A

, B

, C

. Let L, M, N be the midpoints of segments AA

,

BB

, CC

**; let G the centroid of triangle ´LMN (We will not considere positions of
**

A

, B

, C

**such that the points L, M, N do not form a triangle) What is the locus of
**

point G as A

, B

, C

**range independently over the plane ε?
**

1.4 4

th

IMO, Czechoslovakia, 1962

1. Find the smallest natural number n which has the following properties:

(a) Its decimal representation has 6 as the last digit.

(b) If the last digit 6 is erased and placed in front of the remaining digits, the

resulting number is four times as large as the original number n

2. Determine all real number x which satisfy the inequality:

√

3 −x −

√

x + 1 >

1

2

3. Consider the cube ABCDA

B

C

D

(ABCD and A

B

C

D

**are the upper and lower
**

bases, respectively, and edges AA

, BB

, CC

, DD

**are parallel) The point X moves
**

at constant speed along the perimeterof the square ABCD in the direction ABCDA,

and the point Y moves at the same rate along the perimeter of the square B

C

CB

in the direction B

C

CBB

**. Points X and Y begin their motion at the same instant
**

from the starting position A and B

**, respectively. Determine and draw the locus of
**

the midpoints of the segment XY .

4. Solve the ecuation cos

2

x + cos

2

2x + cos

2

3x = 1

5. On the circle K there are given three distinct points A, B, C. Construct (using only

straightedge and compasses) a fourth point D on K such that a circle can be inscribed

in the cuadrilateral thus obtained.

10 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

6. Considere an isosceles triangle. let r be the radius of its circumscribed circle and ρ

the radius of its inscribed circle. Prove that the distance d between the centers of

these two circles is

d =

r (r −2ρ)

7. The tetrahedon SABC has the following propoerty: there exists ﬁve spheres, each

tangent to the edges SA, SB, SC, BC, CA, AB or their extentions.

(a) Prove that the tetrahedron SABC is regular.

(b) Prove conversely that for every regular tetrahedron ﬁve such spheres exist.

1.5 5

th

IMO, Poland, 1963

1. Find all real roots of the equation

√

x

2

−p +2

√

x

2

−1 = x, where p is a real param-

eter.

2. Point A and segment BC are given. Determine the locus of points in space which

are vertices of right angles with one side passing throught A, and the other side

intersecting the segment BC.

3. In an n−gon all of whose interior angles are equal, the lenght of consecutive sides

satisfy the relation a

1

≥ a

2

≥ ≥ a

n

. Prove that a

1

= a

2

= = a

n

.

4. Find all solution x

1

, x

2

, x

3

, x

4

, x

5

of the system

(1) x

5

+x

2

= yx

1

(2) x

1

+x

3

= yx

2

(3) x

2

+x

4

= yx

3

(4) x

3

+x

5

= yx

4

(5) x

4

+x

1

= yx

5

where y is a parameter

5. Prove that

cos

π

7

−cos

2π

7

+ cos

3π

7

=

1

2

6. Five students, A, B, C, D, E, took part in a contest. One prediction was that

contestants would ﬁnish in the order ABCDE. This prediction was very poor. In fact

no contestant ﬁnished in the position predicted, and no two contestants predicted to

ﬁnish consecutively actually did so. A second prediction has the contestants ﬁnishing

1.6. 6

TH

IMO, USSR, 1964 11

in the order DAECB. This prediction was better. Exactly two of the contestants

ﬁnished in the places predicted, and two disjoint pairs of students predicted to ﬁnish

consecutively actually did so. Determine the order in which the contestants ﬁnished.

1.6 6

th

IMO, USSR, 1964

1. (a) Find all positive integers n for which 2

n

−1 is divisible by 7.

(b) Prove that there is not positive integer n such that 2

n

+ 1 is dibisible by 7.

2. Let a, b, c be the sides of a triangle. Prove that

a

2

(b +c −a) +b

2

(c +a −b) +c

2

(a +b −c) ≤ 3abc

3. A circle is inscribed in triangle ´ABC with sides a, b, c. Tangents to the circle

parallel to the sides of the triangle are constructed. Each of these tangents cuts oﬀ a

triangle from ´ABC. In each of these triangle, a circle is inscribed. Find the sum

of the areas of all four inscribed circles (in terms of a, b, c)

4. Seventeen people correspond by mail with one another, each one with all the rest.

In their letters only three diﬀerent topics are discussed. Each pair of correspondent

deals with only one of these topics. Prove that there are at least three people who

write to each other about the same topic.

5. Suppose ﬁve points in a plane are situated so that no two of the straight lines joining

the other four points. Determine the maximum number of intersections that these

perpendiculars can have.

6. In tetrahedron ABCD, vertex D is connected with D

0

the centroid of ´ABC. Lines

parallel to DD

0

are drawn through A, B and C. These lines intersect the planes

BCD, CAD and ABD in points A

1

, B

1

and C

1

, respectively. Prove that the volume

of ABCD is one third the volume of A

1

B

1

C

1

D

0

. Is the result true if point D

0

is

selected anywhere within ´ABC?

1.7 7

th

IMO, West Germany, 1965

1. Determine all value x in the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 2π which satisfy the inequality

2 cos x ≤

√

1 + sin 2x −

√

1 −sin 2x

≤

√

2

12 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

2. Consider the system of equations

a

11

x

1

+a

12

x

2

+a

13

x

3

= 0

a

21

x

1

+a

22

x

2

+a

23

x

3

= 0

a

31

x

1

+a

32

x

2

+a

33

x

3

= 0

with unknowns x

1

, x

2

, x

3

. The coeﬃcient satisfy the conditions:

(a) a

11

, a

22

, a

33

are positive numbers;

(b) the remaining coeﬃcients are negative numbers;

(c) in each equation, the sum of the coeﬃcient is positive .

Prove that the given system has only the solution x

1

= x

2

= x

3

= 0.

3. Given the tetrahedron ABCD whose edges AB and CD have lenght a and b respec-

tively. The distance between the skew lines AB and CD is d, and the angle between

them is ω. Tetrahedron ABCD is divided into two solid by plane ε, parallel to lines

AB and CD. The ratio of the distances of ε from AB and CD is equal to k. Compute

the ratio of the volumes of the two solids obtained.

4. Find all sets of four real numbers x

1

, x

2

, x

3

, x

4

such that the sum of any one and

the product of the other three is equal to 2.

5. Consider ´OAB with acute angle AOB. Through a point M = O perpendiculars

are dawn to OA and OB, the feet of which are P and Q respectively. The point of

intersection of the altitudes of ´OPQ is H. What is the locus of H if M is permitted

to range over

(a) the side AB?

(b) the interior of ´OAB?

6. In a plane a set of n points (n ≥ 3) is given. Each pair of points is connected by a

segment. Let d be the length of the longest of these segment. We deﬁne a diameter of

the set to be any connecting segment of length d. Prove that the number of diameters

of the given set is at most n.

1.8 8

th

IMO, Bulgaria, 1966

1. In a mathematical contest, three problems, A, B, C were posed. Among the par-

ticipants there were 25 students who solved at least one problem each. Of all the

1.9. 9

TH

IMO, YUGOSLAVIA, 1967 13

contestants who did not solve problem A, the number who solved B was twice the

number who solved C. The number of students who solved only problem A was one

more than the number of students who solved A and at least one other problem. How

many students solved only problem B?

2. Let a, b, c be the lengths of the sides of a triangle and α, β, γ, respectively, the

angles opposite these sides. Prove tat if a +b = tan

γ

2

(a tanα +b tan β), the triangle

is isosceles.

3. Prove: The sum of the distances of the vertices of a regular tetrahedron from the

centre of its circumscribed sphere is less than the sum of the distances of these vertices

from any other poin in space.

4. Prove that for every natural number n, and for every real number x =

kπ

2

t

(t any

non-negative integer and k any integer),

1

sin 2x

+

1

sin 4x

+ +

1

sin 2

n

x

= cot x −cot 2

n

x

5. Solve the system of equations

[a

1

−a

2

[x

2

+ [a

1

−a

3

[x

3

+ [a

1

−a

4

[x

4

= 1

[a

2

−a

1

[x

2

+ [a

2

−a

3

[x

3

+ [a

2

−a

4

[x

4

= 1

[a

3

−a

1

[x

1

+ [a

3

−a

2

[x

2

+ [a

3

−a

4

[x

4

= 1

[a

4

−a

1

[x

1

+ [a

4

−a

2

[x

2

+ [a

4

−a

3

[x

3

= 1

where a

1

, a

2

, a

3

, a

4

are four diﬀerent real numbers.

6. In the interior of sides BC, CA, AB of triangle ´ABC, any points K, L, M, respec-

tively, are selected. Prove that the area of at least one of the triangle ´AML, ´BKM, ´CLK

is less than or equal to one quarter of the area of ´ABC

1.9 9

th

IMO, Yugoslavia, 1967

1. Let ABCD be a parallelogram with side lengths AB = a, AD = 1, and with BAD =

α. If ´ABD is acute, prove that the four circles of radius 1 with centers A, B, C, D

cover the parallelogram if and only if a ≤ cos α +

√

3 sin α.

2. Prove that if one and only one edge of a tetrahedron is greater than 1, then its volume

is smaller than or equal to

1

8

14 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

3. Let k, m, n be natural numbers such that m +k + 1 is a prime greater than n + 1.

Let c

s

= s (s + 1). Prove that the product (c

m+1

−c

k

) (c

m+2

−c

k

) (c

m+n

−c

k

) is

divisible by the product c

1

c

2

c

n

.

4. Let ´A

0

B

0

C

0

and ´A

1

B

1

C

1

be any two acute-angled triangles. Consider all triangles

´ABC that are similar to ´A

1

B

1

C

1

and circumscribed about triangle ´A

0

B

0

C

0

(where A

0

lies on BC, B

0

on CA and C

0

on AB) Of all such triangles, determine the

one with maximum area, and construct it.

5. Consider the sequence ¦c

n

¦, where

c

1

= a

1

+ a

2

+ + a

8

c

2

= a

2

1

+ a

2

2

+ + a

2

8

.

.

.

c

n

= a

n

1

+ a

n

2

+ + a

n

8

.

.

.

in which a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

8

are real numbers not all equal to zero. Suppose that an inﬁnite

number of terms of the sequence ¦c

n

¦ are equal to zero. Find all natural numbers for

which c

n

= 0.

6. In a sport contest, there were m medals awarded on n successive days (n > 1). On

the ﬁrst day, one medal and

1

7

of the remaining medals were awarded. On the second

day, two medals and

1

7

of the now remaining medals were awarded; and so on. On

the n-th and last day, the remaining n medals were awarded. How many days did

the contest last. and how many medals were awarded altogether?

1.10 10

th

IMO, USSR, 1968

1. Prove that there is one and only one triangle whose side lengths are consecutive

integers, and one of whose angles is twice as large as another.

2. Find all natural numbers x such that the product of their digits (in decimal notation)

is equal to x

2

−10x −22.

1.10. 10

TH

IMO, USSR, 1968 15

3. Consider the system of equations:

ax

2

1

+ bx

1

+ c = x

2

ax

2

2

+ bx

2

+ c = x

3

.

.

.

ax

2

n−1

+ bx

n−1

+ c = x

n

ax

2

n

+ bx

n

+ c = x

1

with unknowns x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

, where a, b, c are real and a = 0. Let ´ = (b −1)

2

−

4ac. Prove that for this system

(a) If ´ < 0, ther is no solution,

(b) If ´ = 0, ther is exactly one solution,

(c) If ´ > 0, ther is more than one solution.

4. Prove than in every tetrahedon there is a vertex such that the three edges meeting

there have lengths which are the sides of a triangle.

5. Let f be a real-valued function deﬁned for all real numbers x such that, for some

positive constant a, the equation

f (x +a) =

1

2

+

f (x) −[f (x)]

2

holds for all x

(a) Prove that the function f is periodic (i.e. there exists a positive number b such

that f (x +b) = f (x) for all x)

(b) For a = 1, give an example of a non-constant function with the requiered prop-

erties.

6. For every natural number n, evaluate the sum

∞

¸

k=0

¸

n + 2

k

2

k+1

¸

=

¸

n + 1

2

¸

+

¸

n + 2

4

¸

+ +

¸

n + 2

k

2

k+1

¸

+

(the symbol x| denotes the greatest integer not exceding x).

16 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

1.11 11

th

IMO, Romania, 1969

1. Prove that there are inﬁnitely many numbers a with the following property: the

number z = n

4

+a is not prime for any natural number n.

2. Let a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

be real variable, and

f (x) = cos (a

1

+x) +

1

2

cos (a

2

+x) +

1

4

cos (a

3

+x) + +

1

2

n−1

cos (a

n

+x)

Given that f (x

1

) = f (x

2

) = 0, prove that x

2

−x

1

= mπ for some integer m.

3. For each value of k = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ﬁnd necessary and suﬃcient conditions on the

number a > 0 so that there exist a tetrahedron with k edges of length a, and the

remaining 6 −k edges of lenght 1.

4. A semicircular arc γ is drawn on AB as diameter. C is a point on γ other than A and

B, and D is the foot of the perpendicular from C to AB. We consider three circles

γ

1

, γ

2

, γ

3

, all tangent to the line AB. Of these, γ

1

is inscrived in ´ABC, while γ

2

and γ

3

are both tangent to CD and to γ, one on each side of CD. Prove that γ

1

, γ

2

and γ

3

have a second tangent in common.

5. Given n > 4 points in the plane such that no three are collinear. Prove that there

are at least

n−3

2

**convex quadrilaterals whose vertices are four of the given points.
**

6. Prove that for all real numbers x

1

, x

2

, y

1

, y

2

, z

1

, z

2

with x

1

> 0, x

2

> 0, x

1

y

1

−z

2

1

>

0, x

2

y

2

−z

2

2

> 0, the inequality

8

(x

1

+x

2

) (y

1

+y

2

) −(z

1

+z

2

)

2

≤

1

x

1

y

1

−z

2

1

+

1

x

2

y

2

−z

2

2

is satisﬁed. Give necessary and suﬃcient conditions for equality.

1.12 12

th

IMO, Hungary, 1970

1. Let M be a point on the sede AB of ´ABC. Let r

1

, r

2

and r be the radii of the

inscribed circles of the triangles ´AMC, ´BMC and ´ABC. Let q

1

, q

2

and q be

the radii of the excribed circles of the same triangles that lie in the angle ´ACB.

Prove that

r

1

q

1

r

2

q

2

=

r

q

1.12. 12

TH

IMO, HUNGARY, 1970 17

2. Let a, b and n be integers greater than 1, and let a and b be the two bases of two

number systems. A

n−1

and A

n

are numbers in the system with base a and B

n−1

and

B

n

are numbers in the system with base b; these are related as follows:

A

n

= x

n

x

n−1

x

0

A

n−1

= x

n−1

x

n−2

x

0

B

n

= x

n

x

n−1

x

0

B

n−1

= x

n−1

x

n−2

x

0

such that x

n

= 0 and x

n−1

= 0

1

. Prove that

A

n−1

A

n

<

B

n−1

B

n

⇒ ⇐ a > b

3. The real numbers a

0

, a

1

, . . . , a

n

, . . . satisfy the condition 1 = a

0

≤ a

1

≤ a

2

≤ ≤

a

n

≤ . The numbers b

1

, b

2

, . . . , b

n

, . . . are deﬁned by

b

n

=

n

¸

k=1

1 −

a

k−1

a

k

1

√

a

k

(a) Prove that 0 ≤ b

n

< 2 for all n.

(a) Given c with 0 ≤ c < 2, prove that there exist numbers a

0

, a

1

, . . . such that

b

n

> c for large enough n.

4. Find the set of all positive integers n with the property that the set ¦n, n + 1, n +

2, n + 3, n + 4, n + 5¦ can be partitioned into sets such that the product of the

numbers in one set equals the product of the numbers in the other set

5. In the tetrahedron ABCD, the angle BDC is a right angle. Suppose that the foot

H of the perpendicular from D to the plane ABC is the intersection of the altitudes

of ´ABC. Prove that

(AB +BC +CA)

2

≤ 6

AD

2

+BD

2

+CD

2

**For what tetrahedra does equality hold?
**

6. In the plane are 100 points, no three of them are collinear. Consider all posible

triangles having these points as vertices. Prove that no more than 70% of these

triangles are acute-angled.

1

The x

i

’s are the digits in the respective bases, and of course, all of them are lower than the lowest base

18 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

1.13 13

th

IMO, Czechoslovakia, 1971

1. Prove that the following assertion is true for n = 3 and n = 5, and that it is false

for every other natural number n > 2. If a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

are arbitrary real numbers,

then:

(a

1

−a

2

) (a

1

−a

3

) (a

1

−a

n

) + (a

2

−a

1

) (a

2

−a

3

) (a

2

−a

n

)

+ + (a

n

−a

1

) (a

n

−a

2

) (a

n

−a

n−1

) ≤ 0

2. Consider a convex polyhedron P

1

with nine vertices A

1

A

2

, ..., A

9

; let P

i

be the poly-

hedron obtained from P

1

by a translation that moves vertex A

1

to A

i

(i = 2, 3, ..., 9).

Provethat at least two of the polyhedra P

1

, P

2

, ..., P

9

have an interiorpoint in common.

3. Prove that the set of integers of the form 2

k

− 3(k = 2, 3, ...) contains an inﬁnite

subset in which every two members are relatively prime.

4. All the faces of tetrahedron ABCD are acute-angled triangles. We consider all closed

polygonal paths of the form XY ZTX deﬁned as follows: X is a point on edge AB

distinct from A and B; similarly, Y, Z, T are interior points of edges BCCD, DA,

respectively. Prove:

(a) If DAB +BCD = CDA+ABC, then among thepolygonal paths, there is

none of minimal length.

(b) If DAB + BCD = CDA + ABC, then there areinﬁnitely many shortest

polygonal paths, their common length being 2AC sin(α/2), where α = BAC +

CAD +DAB.

5. Prove that for every natural number m, there exists a ﬁnite set S of points in a plane

with the following property: For every point A in S, there are exactly m points in S

which are at unit distance from A.

6. Let A = (a

ij

)(i, j = 1, 2, ..., n) be a square matrix whose elements are non-negative

integers. Suppose that whenever an element a

ij

= 0, the sum of the elements in the

ith row and the jth column is ≥ n. Prove that the sum of all the elements of the

matrix is ≥ n

2

/2.

1.14 14

th

IMO, USSR, 1972

1. Prove that from a set of ten distinct two-digit numbers (in the decimalsystem), it is

possible to select two disjoint subsets whose members havethe same sum.

1.15. 15

TH

IMO, USSR, 1973 19

2. Prove that if n ≥ 4, every quadrilateral that can be inscribed in acircle can be

dissected into n quadrilaterals each of which is inscribablein a circle.

3. Let m and n be arbitrary non-negative integers. Prove that

(2m)!(2n)!

m!n!(m +n)!

is an integer. (0! = 1)

4. Find all solutions (x

1

, x

2

, x

3

, x

4

, x

5

) of the system of inequalities

(x

2

1

−x

3

x

5

)(x

2

2

−x

3

x

5

) ≤ 0

(x

2

2

−x

4

x

1

)(x

2

3

−x

4

x

1

) ≤ 0

(x

2

3

−x

5

x

2

)(x

2

4

−x

5

x

2

) ≤ 0

(x

2

4

−x

1

x

3

)(x

2

5

−x

1

x

3

) ≤ 0

(x

2

5

−x

2

x

4

)(x

2

1

−x

2

x

4

) ≤ 0

where x

1

, x

2

, x

3

, x

4

, x

5

are positive real numbers.

5. Let f and g be real-valued functions deﬁned for all real values of xand y, and satisfying

the equation

f(x +y) +f(x −y) = 2f(x)g(y)

for all x, y. Prove that if f(x) is not identically zero, and if [f(x)[ ≤ 1 for all x, then

[g(y)[ ≤ 1 for all y.

6. Given four distinct parallel planes, prove that there exists a regular tetrahedron with

a vertex on each plane.

1.15 15

th

IMO, USSR, 1973

1. Point O lies on line g;

−−→

OP

1

,

−−→

OP

2

, . . . ,

−−→

OP

n

are unit vectors such that points P

1

, P

2

, ..., P

n

all lie in a plane containing g and on one side of g. Prove that if n is odd,

−−→

OP

1

+

−−→

OP

2

+ +

−−→

OP

n

≥ 1

Here

−−→

OM

**denotes the length of vector
**

−−→

OM.

20 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

2. Determine whether or not there exists a ﬁnite set M of points in spacenot lying in

the same plane such that, for any two points A and B of M,one can select two other

points C and D of M so that lines AB and CD are parallel and not coincident.

3. Let a and b be real numbers for which the equation

x

4

+ax

3

+bx

2

+ax + 1 = 0

has at least one real solution. For all such pairs (a, b), ﬁnd the minimum value of

a

2

+b

2

.

4. A soldier needs to check on the presence of mines in a region having theshape of an

equilateral triangle. The radius of action of his detector isequal to half the altitude of

the triangle. The soldier leaves from one vertex of the triangle. What path should he

follow in order to travel the least possible distance and still accomplish his mission?

5. G is a set of non-constant functions of the real variable x of the form f(x) = ax+b, a

and b are real numbers, and G has the following properties:

(a) If f and g are in G, then g ◦ f is in G; here (g ◦ f)(x) = g[f(x)].

(b) If f is in G, then its inverse f

−1

is in G; here the inverse of f(x) = ax + b is

f

−1

(x) = (x −b)/a.

(c) For every f in G, there exists a real number x

f

such that f(x

f

) = x

f

.

Prove that there exists a real number k such that f(k) = k for all f in G.

6. Let a

1

, a

2

, ..., a

n

be n positive numbers, and let q be a givenreal number such that

0 < q < 1. Find n numbers b

1

, b

2

, ..., b

n

forwhich

(a) a

k

< b

k

for k = 1, 2, , n,

(b) q <

b

k+1

b

k

<

1

q

for k = 1, 2, ..., n −1,

(c) b

1

+b

2

+ +b

n

<

1+q

1−q

(a

1

+ a

2

+ +a

n

).

1.16 16

th

IMO, West Germany, 1974

1. Three players A, B and C play the following game: On each of three cardsan integer

is written. These three numbers p, q, r satisfy 0 < p < q < r. Thethree cards are

shuﬄed and one is dealt to each player. Each then receivesthe number of counters

indicated by the card he holds. Then the cards areshuﬄed again; the counters remain

with the players.

1.17. 17

TH

IMO, BULGARIA, 1975 21

This process (shuﬄing, dealing, giving out counters) takes place for at least two

rounds. After the last round, A has 20 counters in all, B has 10 and C has 9. At the

last round B received r counters. Who received q counters on the ﬁrst round?

2. In the triangle ´ABC prove that there is a point D on side AB suchthat CD is the

geometric mean of AD and DB if and only if

sin Asin B ≤ sin

2

C

2

.

3. Prove that the number

¸

n

k=0

2n+1

2k+1

2

3k

is not divisible by 5 for any integer n ≥ 0.

4. Consider decompositions of an 8 8 chessboard into p non-overlapping rectangles

subject to the following conditions:

(i) Each rectangle has as many white squares as black squares.

(ii) If a

i

is the number of white squares in the i-th rectangle, then a

1

< a

2

< < a

p

.

Find the maximum value of p for which such a decomposition is possible. For this

value of p, determine all possible sequences a

1

, a

2

, , a

p

.

5. Determine all possible values of

S =

a

a +b +d

+

b

a +b +c

+

c

b +c +d

+

d

a +c +d

where a, b, c, d are arbitrary positive numbers.

6. Let P be a non-constant polynomial with integer coeﬃcients. If n(P) isthe number

of distinct integers k such that (P(k))

2

= 1, prove that n(P) − deg(P) ≤ 2, where

deg(P) denotes the degree of the polynomial P.

1.17 17

th

IMO, Bulgaria, 1975

1. Let x

i

, y

i

(i = 1, 2, ..., n) be real numbers such that

x

1

≥ x

2

≥ ≥ x

n

and y

1

≥ y

2

≥ ≥ y

n

Prove that, if z

1

, z

2

, , z

n

is any permutation of y

1

, y

2

, , y

n

, then

n

¸

i=1

(x

i

−y

i

)

2

≤

n

¸

i=1

(x

i

−z

i

)

2

22 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

2. Let a

1

, a

2

, a

3,

be an inﬁnite increasing sequence of positive integers. Prove that for

every p ≥ 1 there are inﬁnitely many a

m

which can be written in the form

a

m

= xa

p

+ya

q

with x, y positive integers and q > p.

3. On the sides of an arbitrary triangle ABC, triangles ABR, BCP, CAQ areconstructed

externally with CBP = CAQ = 45

◦

, BCP = ACQ = 30

◦

, ABR = BAR =

15

◦

. Prove that QRP = 90

◦

and QR = RP.

4. When 4444

4444

is written in decimal notation, the sum of its digits is A. Let B be

the sum of the digits of A. Find the sum of the digits of B. (A and B are written in

decimal notation.)

5. Determine, with proof, whether or not one can ﬁnd 1975 points on the circumference

of a circle with unit radius such that the distance between any two of them is a

rational number.

6. Find all polynomials P, in two variables, with the following properties:

(i) for a positive integer n and all real t, x, y

P(tx, ty) = t

n

P(x, y)

(that is, P is homogeneous of degree n),

(ii) for all real a, b, c,

P(b +c, a) +P(c +a, b) +P(a +b, c) = 0

(iii) P(1, 0) = 1.

1.18 18

th

IMO, Austria, 1976

1. In a plane convex quadrilateral of area 32, the sum of the lengths of two opposite

sides and one diagonal is 16. Determine all possible lengths ofthe other diagonal.

2. Let P

1

(x) = x

2

− 2 and P

j

(x) = P

1

(P

j−1

(x)) for j = 2, 3, .Show that, for any

positive integer n, the roots of the equation P

n

(x) = x are real and distinct.

1.19. 19

TH

IMO, YUGOSLAVIA, 1977 23

3. A rectangular box can be ﬁlled completely with unit cubes. If one places as many

cubes as possible, each with volume 2, in the box, so that their edges are parallel

to the edges of the box, one can ﬁll exactly 40% ofthe box. Determine the possible

dimensions of all such boxes.

4. Determine, with proof, the largest number which is the product of positiveintegers

whose sum is 1976.

5. Consider the system of p equations in q = 2p unknowns x

1

, x

2

, , x

q

:

a

11

x

1

+a

12

x

2

+ +a

1q

x

q

= 0

a

21

x

1

+a

22

x

2

+ +a

2q

x

q

= 0

a

p1

x

1

+a

p2

x

2

+ +a

pq

x

q

= 0

with every coeﬃcient a

ij

member of the set ¦−1, 0, 1¦. Prove that the system has a

solution (x

1

, x

2

, , x

q

) such that

(a) all x

j

(j = 1, 2, ..., q) are integers,

(b) there is at least one value of j for which x

j

= 0,

(c) [x

j

[ ≤ q(j = 1, 2, ..., q).

6. A sequence ¦u

n

¦ is deﬁned by

u

0

= 2, u

1

= 5/2, u

n+1

= u

n

(u

2

n−1

−2) −u

1

for n = 1, 2,

Prove that for positive integers n,

[u

n

] = 2

[2

n

−(−1)

n

]/3

where [x] denotes the greatest integer ≤ x.

1.19 19

th

IMO, Yugoslavia, 1977

1. Equilateral triangles ´ABK, ´BCL, ´CDM, ´DAN are constructed inside the

square ABCD. Prove that the midpoints of the four segments KL, LM, MN, NK

and the midpoints of the eight segments AK, BK, BL, CL, CM, DM, DN, AN

are the twelve vertices of a regular dodecagon.

24 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

2. In a ﬁnite sequence of real numbers the sum of any seven successive terms is nega-

tive, and the sum of any eleven successive terms is positive.Determine the maximum

number of terms in the sequence.

3. Let n be a given integer > 2, and let V

n

be the set of integers 1+kn, where k = 1, 2, ....

A number m ∈ V

n

is called indecomposable in V

n

if there do not exist numbers

p, q ∈ V

n

such that pq = m. Prove that there exists a number r ∈ V

n

that can be

expressed as the product of elements indecomposable in V

n

in more than one way.

(Products which diﬀer only in the order of their factors will be considered the same.)

4. Four real constants a, b, A, B are given, and

f(θ) = 1 −a cos θ −b sin θ −Acos 2θ −Bsin 2θ

Prove that if f(θ) ≥ 0 for all real θ, then

a

2

+b

2

≤ 2 and A

2

+B

2

≤ 1.

5. Let a and b be positive integers. When a

2

+ b

2

is divided by a + b,the quotient is q

and the remainder is r. Find all pairs (a, b) suchthat q

2

+r = 1977.

6. Let f(n) be a function deﬁned on the set of all positive integers and having all its

values in the same set. Prove that if f(n + 1) > f(f(n)) for each positive integer n,

then f(n) = n for each n.

1.20 20

th

IMO, Romania, 1978

1. m and n are natural numbers with 1 ≤ m < n. In their decimal representations, the

last three digits of 1978

m

are equal, respectively, to the last three digits of 1978

n

.

Find m and n such that m +n has its least value.

2. P is a given point inside a given sphere. Three mutually perpendicular rays from P

intersect the sphere at points U, V, and W; Q denotes the vertex diagonally opposite

to P in the parallelepiped determined by PU, PV, and PW. Find the locus of Q for

all such triads of rays from P.

3. The set of all positive integers is the union of two disjoint subsets ¦f(1), f(2), ..., f(n), ...¦,

¦g(1), g(2), ..., g(n), ...¦, where

f(1) < f(2) < < f(n) <

1.21. 21

ST

IMO, UNITED KINGDOM, 1979 25

g(1) < g(2) < < g(n) <

and

g(n) = f(f(n)) + 1 for all n ≥ 1

Determine f(240).

4. In triangle ´ABC, AB = AC. A circle is tangent internally to thecircumcircle of

triangle ABC and also to sides AB, AC at P, Q, respectively. Prove that the

midpoint of segment PQ is the center of the incircle of triangle ´ABC.

5. Let ¦a

k

¦(k = 1, 2, 3, ..., n, ...) be a sequence of distinct positive integers. Prove that

for all natural numbers n,

n

¸

k=1

a

k

k

2

≥

n

¸

k=1

1

k

6. An international society has its members from six diﬀerent countries. The list of

members contains 1978 names, numbered 1, 2, ..., 1978. Prove that there is at least

one member whose number is the sum of thenumbers of two members from his own

country, or twice as large as the numberof one member from his own country.

1.21 21

st

IMO, United Kingdom, 1979

1. Let p and q be natural numbers such that

p

q

= 1 −

1

2

+

1

3

−

1

4

+ −

1

1318

+

1

1319

Prove that p is divisible by 1979.

2. A prism with pentagons A

1

A

2

A

3

A

4

A

5

and B

1

B

2

B

3

B

4

B

5

as top and bottom faces is

given. Each side of the two pentagons and each of the line-segments A

i

B

j

for all

i, j = 1, ..., 5, is colored either red or green. Every triangle whose vertices are vertices

of the prism and whose sides have all been colored has two sides of a diﬀerent color.

Show that all 10 sides of the top and bottom faces are the same color.

3. Two circles in a plane intersect. Let A be one of the points of intersection. Starting

simultaneously from A two points move with constant speeds, each point travelling

along its own circle in the same sense. The two points return to A simultaneously

after one revolution. Prove that there is a ﬁxed point P in the plane such that, at

any time, the distances from P to the moving points are equal.

26 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

4. Given a plane π, a point P in this plane and a point Q not in π, ﬁnd all points R in

π such that the ratio (QP +PA)/QR is a maximum.

5. Find all real numbers a for which there exist non-negative real numbers x

1

, x

2

, x

3

, x

4

, x

5

satisfying the relations

5

¸

k=1

kx

k

= a,

5

¸

k=1

k

3

x

k

= a

2

,

5

¸

k=1

k

5

x

k

= a

3

6. Let A and E be opposite vertices of a regular octagon. A frog starts jumping at

vertex A. From any vertex of the octagon except E, it may jump to either of the two

adjacent vertices. When it reaches vertex E, the frog stops and stays there.. Let a

n

be the number of distinct paths of exactly n jumps ending at E. Prove that a

2n−1

= 0,

a

2n

=

1

√

2

(x

n−1

−y

n−1

), n = 1, 2, 3, ,

where x = 2 +

√

2 and y = 2 −

√

2

Note. A path of n jumps is a sequence of vertices (P

0

, ..., P

n

) such that

(i) P

0

= A, P

n

= E;

(ii) for every i, 0 ≤ i ≤ n −1, P

i

is distinct from E;

(iii) for every i, 0 ≤ i ≤ n −1, P

i

and P

i+1

are adjacent.

1.22 22

nd

IMO, Washington, USA, 1981

1. P is a point inside a given triangle ABC.D, E, F are the feet of the perpendiculars

from P to the lines BC, CA, AB respectively. Find all P for which

BC

PD

+

CA

PE

+

AB

PF

is least.

2. Let 1 ≤ r ≤ n and consider all subsets of r elements of theset ¦1, 2, ..., n¦. Each

of these subsets has a smallest member. Let F(n, r) denote the arithmetic mean of

these smallest numbers; prove that

F(n, r) =

n + 1

r + 1

1.23. 23

RD

IMO, BUDAPEST, HUNGARY, 1982 27

3. Determine the maximum value of m

3

+ n

3

,where m and n are integers satisfying

m, n ∈ ¦1, 2, ..., 1981¦ and (n

2

−mn −m

2

)

2

= 1

4. (a) For which values of n > 2 is there a set of n consecutive positive integers such

that the largest number in the set is a divisor of the least common multiple of the

remaining n −1 numbers?

(b) For which values of n > 2 is there exactly one set having the stated property?

5. Three congruent circles have a common point O and lie inside a given triangle. Each

circle touches a pair of sides of the triangle. Prove that the incenter and the circum-

center of the triangle and the point O are collinear.

6. The function f(x, y) satisﬁes

(1) f(0, y) = y + 1,

(2)f(x + 1, 0) = f(x, 1),

(3) f(x + 1, y + 1) = f(x, f(x + 1, y)),

for all non-negative integers x, y. Determine f(4, 1981).

1.23 23

rd

IMO, Budapest, Hungary, 1982

1. The function f(n) is deﬁned for all positive integers n and takes on non-negative

integer values. Also, for all m, n

f(m +n) −f(m) −f(n) = 0 or 1

f(2) = 0, f(3) > 0, and f(9999) = 3333

Determine f(1982).

2. A non-isosceles triangle A

1

A

2

A

3

is given with sides a

1

, a

2

, a

3

(a

i

is the side opposite

A

i

). For all i = 1, 2, 3, M

i

is the midpoint of side a

i

, and T

i

. is the pointwhere the

incircle touches side a

i

. Denote by S

i

the reﬂection of T

i

in the interior bisector of

angle A

i

. Prove that the lines M

1

, S

1

, M

2

S

2

, and M

3

S

3

are concurrent.

3. Consider the inﬁnite sequences ¦x

n

¦ of positive real numbers with the following prop-

erties:

x

0

= 1, and for all i ≥ 0, x

i+1

≤ x

i

28 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

(a) Prove that for every such sequence, there is an n ≥ 1 such that

x

2

0

x

1

+

x

2

1

x

2

+ +

x

2

n−1

x

n

≥ 3.999

(b) Find such a sequence for which

x

2

0

x

1

+

x

2

1

x

2

+ +

x

2

n−1

x

n

< 4

4. Prove that if n is a positive integer such that the equation x

3

− 3xy

2

+ y

3

= n has

a solution in integers (x, y), then it has at least three suchsolutions. Show that the

equation has no solutions in integers when n = 2891

5. The diagonals AC and CE of the regular hexagon ABCDEF are divided by the

inner points M and N, respectively, so that

AM

AC

=

CN

CE

= r

Determine r if B, M, and N are collinear.

6. Let S be a square with sides of length 100, and let L be a path within S which does

not meet itself and which is composed of line segments A

0

A

1

, A

1

A

2

, , A

n−1

A

n

with

A

0

= A

n

. Suppose that for every point P of the boundary of S there is a point of L

at a distance from P not greater than 1/2. Prove that there are two points X and Y

in L such that the distance between X and Y is not greater than 1, and the length

of that part of L which lies between X and Y is not smaller than 198.

1.24 24

th

IMO, Paris, France, 1983

1. Find all functions f deﬁned on the set of positive real numbers which take positive

real values and satisfy the conditions:

(i) f(xf(y)) = yf(x) for all positive x, y;

(ii) f(x) → 0 as x → ∞

2. Let A be one of the two distinct points of intersection of two unequal coplanar circles

C

1

and C

2

with centers O

1

and O

2

, respectively. One of the common tangents to the

circles touches C

1

at P

1

and C

2

at P

2

, while the other touches C

1

at Q

1

and C

2

at

Q

2

. Let M

1

be the midpoint of P

1

Q

1

,and M

2

be the midpoint of P

2

Q

2

. Prove that

O

1

AO

2

= M

1

AM

2

.

1.25. 25

TH

IMO, PRAGUE, CZECHOSLOVAKIA, 1984 29

3. Let a, b and c be positive integers, no two of which have a common divisor greater

than 1. Show that 2abc −ab −bc −ca is the largest integer which cannot be expressed

in the form xbc +yca +zab,where x, y and z are non-negative integers.

4. Let ABC be an equilateral triangle and c the set of all points contained in the three

segments AB, BC and CA (including A, B and C). Determine whether, for every

partition of c into two disjoint subsets, at least one of the two subsets contains the

vertices of a right-angled triangle. Justify your answer.

5. Is it possible to choose 1983 distinct positive integers, all less than or equal to 10

5

,

no three of which are consecutive terms of an arithmetic progression? Justify your

answer.

6. Let a, b and c be the lengths of the sides of a triangle. Prove that

a

2

b(a −b) +b

2

c(b −c) +c

2

a(c −a) ≥ 0

Determine when equality occurs.

1.25 25

th

IMO, Prague, Czechoslovakia, 1984

1. Prove that

0 ≤ yz +zx +xy −2xyz ≤

7

27

where x, y and z arenon-negative real numbers for which x +y +z = 1.

2. Find one pair of positive integers a and b such that:

(i) ab(a +b) is not divisible by 7;

(ii) (a +b)

7

−a

7

−b

7

is divisible by 7

7

.

Justify your answer.

3. In the plane two diﬀerent points O and A are given. For each point X of the plane,

other than O, denote by a(X) the measure of the angle between OA and OX in

radians, counterclockwise from OA(0 ≤ a(X) < 2π). Let C(X) be the circle with

center O and radius of length OX +a(X)/OX. Each point of the plane is colored by

one of a ﬁnite number ofcolors. Prove that there exists a point Y for which a(Y ) > 0

such that its color appears on the circumference of the circle C(Y ).

30 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

4. Let ABCD be a convex quadrilateral such that the line CD is a tangent to the circle

on AB as diameter. Prove that the line AB is a tangent to the circle on CD as

diameter if and only if the lines BC and AD are parallel.

5. Let d be the sum of the lengths of all the diagonals of a plane convex polygon with

n vertices (n > 3), and let p be its perimeter. Prove that

n −3 <

2d

p

<

¸

n

2

¸

n + 1

2

−2

where [x] denotes the greatest integer not exceeding x.

6. Let a, b, c and d be odd integers such that 0 < a < b < c < d and ad = bc. Prove that

if a +d = 2

k

and b +c = 2

m

for some integers k and m, then a = 1.

1.26 26

th

IMO, Helsinki, Finland, 1985

1. A circle has center on the side AB of the cyclic quadrilateral ABCD. The other three

sides are tangent to the circle. Prove that AD +BC = AB

2. Let n and k be given relatively prime natural numbers, k < n. Each number in the

set M = ¦1, 2, ..., n −1¦ is colored either blue or white. It is given that

(i) for each i ∈ M, both i and n −i have the same color;

(ii) for each i ∈ M, i = k both i and [i −k[ have the same color. Prove that all

numbers in M must have the same color.

3. For any polynomial P(x) = a

0

+a

1

x+ +a

k

x

k

with integer coeﬃcients, the number

of coeﬃcients which are odd is denoted by w(P). For i = 0, 1, ..., let Q

i

(x) = (1 +x)

i

.

Prove that if i

1

i

2

, ..., i

n

are integers such that 0 ≤ i

1

< i

2

< < i

n

then

w(Q

i

1

+Q

i

2

+ +Q

in

) ≥ w(Q

i

1

)

4. Given a set M of 1985 distinct positive integers, none of which has a prime divisor

greater than 26. Prove that M contains at least one subset of four distinct elements

whose product is the fourth power of an integer.

5. A circle with center O passes through the vertices A and C of triangle ABC and

intersects the segments AB and BC again at distinct points K and N, respectively.

The circumscribed circles of the triangles ´ABC and ´EBN intersect at exactly

two distinct points B and M. Provethat angle OMB is a right angle.

1.27. 27

TH

IMO, WARSAW, POLAND, 1986 31

6. For every real number x

1

, construct the sequence x

1

, x

2

, ... by setting

x

n+1

= x

n

x

n

+

1

n

for each n ≥ 1

Prove that there exists exactly one value of x

1

for which

0 < x

n

< x

n+1

< 1

for every n.

1.27 27

th

IMO, Warsaw, Poland, 1986

1. Let d be any positive integer not equal to 2, 5, or 13. Show that one canind distinct

a, b in the set ¦2, 5, 13, d¦ such that ab −1 is not perfect square.

2. A triangle ´A

1

A

2

A

3

and a point P

0

are given in the plane. We deﬁne A

s

= A

s−3

for

all s ≥ 4. We construct a set of points P

1

, P

2

, P

3

, . . . , such that P

k+1

is the image

of P

k

under a rotation withenter A

k+1

through angle 120

◦

clockwise (for k = 0, 1,

2,ldots). Prove that if P

1986

= P

0

, then the triangle ´A

1

A

2

A

3

equilateral.

3. To each vertex of a regular pentagon an integer is assigned in such a way that the sum

of all ﬁve numbers is positive. If three consecutive vertices are assigned the numbers

x, y, z respectively and y < 0 then the following operation is allowed: the numbers

x, y, z are replaced by x +y, −y, z +y respectively. Such an operation is performed

repeatedly as long as at least one of the ﬁve numbers is negative. Determine whether

this procedure necessarily comes to and end after a ﬁnite number of steps.

4. Let A, B be adjacent vertices of a regular n-gon (n ≥ 5) in thelane having center at

O. A triangle XY Z, which is congruent to andnitially conincides with OAB, moves

in the plane in such a way that Y and Z each trace out the whole boundary of the

polygon, X remaining inside the polygon. Find the locus of X.

5. Find all functions f, deﬁned on the non-negative real numbers and taking non-

negative real values, such that:

(i) f(xf(y))f(y) = f(x +y) for all x, y ≥ 0,

(ii) f(2) = 0,

(iii) f(x) = 0 for 0 ≤ x < 2.

32 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

6. One is given a ﬁnite set of points in the plane, each point having integeroordinates.

Is it always possible to color some of the points in the set rednd the remaining points

white in such a way that for any straight line Larallel to either one of the coordinate

axes the diﬀerence (in absolutealue) between the numbers of white point and red

points on L is not greaterhan 1?

1.28 28

th

IMO, Havana, Cuba , 1987

1. Let p

n

(k) be the number of permutations of the set ¦1, . . . , n¦, n ≥ 1, which have

exactly k ﬁxed points. Prove that

n

¸

k=0

k p

n

(k) = n!

(Remark: A permutation f of a set S is a one-to-one mapping of S onto itself. An

element i in S is called a ﬁxed point of the permutation f if f(i) = i.)

2. In an acute-angled triangle ´ABC the interior bisector of the angle A intersects

BC at L and intersects the circumcircle of ´ABC again at N. From point L per-

pendiculars are drawn to AB and AC, the feet of theseerpendiculars being K and M

respectively. Prove that the quadrilateral AKNM and the triangle ABC have equal

areas.

3. Let x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

be real numbers satisfying x

2

1

+x

2

2

+ + x

2

n

= 1. Prove that for

every integer k ≥ 2 there are integers a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

, not all 0, such that [a

i

[ ≤ k −1

For all i and

[a

1

x

1

+a

1

x

2

+ +a

n

x

n

[ ≤

(k −1)

√

n

k

n

−

4. Prove that there is no function f from the set of non-negative integers into itself such

that f(f(n)) = n + 1987 for every n.

5. Let n be an integer greater than or equal to 3. Prove that there is a set of n points

in the plane such that the distance between any two points is irrational and each set

of three points determines a non-degenerate triangle with rational area.

6. Let n be an integer greater than or equal to 2. Prove that if k

2

+ k +n is prime for

all integers k such that 0 ≤ k ≤

n

3

, then k

2

+k +n is prime for all integers k such

that 0 ≤ k ≤ n −2.

1.29. 29

TH

IMO, CAMBERRA, AUSTRALIA, 1988 33

1.29 29

th

IMO, Camberra, Australia, 1988

1. Consider two coplanar circles of radii R and r (R > r) with the same center. Let P

be a ﬁxed point on the smaller circle and B a variable point on the larger circle. The

line BP meets the larger circle again at C. The perpendicular l to BP at P meets

the smaller circle again at A. (If l is tangent to the circle at P then A = P.)

(i) Find the set of values of BC

2

+CA

2

+AB

2

.

(ii) Find the locus of the midpoint of BC.

2. Let n be a positive integer and let A

1

, A

2

, . . . , A

2n+1

be subsets of a set B. Suppose

that

(a) Each A

i

has exactly 2n elements,

(b) Each A

i

∩ A

j

(1 ≤ i < j ≤ 2n + 1) contains exactly one element, and

(c) Every element of B belongs to at least two of the A

i

.

For which values of n can one assign to every element of B one of the numbers 0 and

1 in such a way that A

i

has 0 assigned to exactly n of its elements?

3. A function f is deﬁned on the positive integers by

f(1) = 1, f(3) = 3,

f(2n) = f(n),

f(4n + 1) = 2f(2n + 1) −f(n),

f(4n + 3) = 3f(2n + 1) −2f(n),

for all positive integers n.

Determine the number of positive integers n, less than or equal to 1988, for which

f(n) = n.

4. Show that set of real numbers x which satisfy the inequality

70

¸

k=1

k

x −k

≥

5

4

is a union of disjoint intervals, the sum of whose lengths is 1988.

5. ´ABC is a triangle right-angled at A, and D is the foot of the altituderom A. The

straight line joining the incenters of the triangles ´ABD, ´ACD intersects the sides

AB, AC at the points K, L respectively. S and T denote the areas of the triangles

´ABC and ´AKL respectively.how that S ≥ 2T.

34 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

6. Let a and b be positive integers such that ab + 1 divides a

2

+b

2

. Show that

a

2

+b

2

ab + 1

is the square of an integer.

1.30 30

th

IMO, Braunschweig, West Germany, 1989

1. Prove that the set ¦1, 2, . . . , 1989¦ can be expressed as the disjoint union of subsets

A

i

(i = 1, 2, . . . , 117) such that:

(i) Each A

i

contains 17 elements;

(ii) The sum of all the elements in each A

i

is the same.

2. In an acute-angled triangle ABC the internal bisector of angle A meets their cumcircle

of the triangle again at A

1

. Points B

1

and C

1

are deﬁned similarly. Let A

0

be the

point of intersection of the line AA

1

with the external bisectors of angles B and C.

Points B

0

and C

0

are deﬁned similarly. Prove that:

(i) The area of the triangle A

0

B

0

C

0

is twice the area of the hexagon AC

1

BA

1

CB

1

.

(ii) The area of the triangle A

0

B

0

C

0

is at least four times the area of the triangle

ABC.

3. Let n and k be positive integers and let S be a set of n points in the plane such that

(i) No three points of S are collinear, and

(ii) For any point P of S there are at least k points of S equidistant from P.

Prove that:

k <

1

2

+

√

2n

4. Let ABCD be a convex quadrilateral such that the sides AB, AD, BC satisfy AB =

AD + BC. There exists a point P inside the quadrilateral at a distance h from the

line CD such that AP = h +AD and BP = h +BC. Show that:

1

√

h

≥

1

√

AD

+

1

√

BC

5. Prove that for each positive integer n there exist n consecutive positive integers none

of which is an integral power of a prime number.

1.30. 30

TH

IMO, BRAUNSCHWEIG, WEST GERMANY, 1989 35

6. A permutation (x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

m

) of the set ¦1, 2, . . . , 2n¦, where n is a positive integer,

is said to have property P if [x

i

− x

i+1

[ = n for at least one i in ¦1, 2, . . . , 2n − 1¦.

Show that, for each n, there are more permutations with property P than without.

36 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

1.31 31

st

IMO, Beijing, People’s Republic of China,

1990

1. Chords AB and CD of a circle intersect at a point E inside the circle. Let M be an

interior point of the segment EB. The tangent line at E to the circle through D, E,

and M intersects the lines BC and AC at F and G, respectively. If

AM

AB

= t,

ﬁnd

EG

EF

in terms of t.

2. Let n ≥ 3 and consider a set E of 2n − 1 distinct points on a circle. Suppose that

exactly k of these points are to be colored black. Such a coloring is “good” if there

is at least one pair of black points such that the interior of one of the arcs between

them contains exactly n points from E. Find the smallest value of k so that every

such coloring of k points of E is good.

3. Determine all integers n > 1 such that

2

n

+ 1

n

2

is an integer.

4. Let Q

+

be the set of positive rational numbers. Construct a function f : Q

+

→ Q

+

such that

f(xf(y)) =

f(x)

y

for all x, y in Q

+

.

5. Given an initial integer n

0

> 1, two players, / and B, choose integers n

1

, n

2

, n

3

,

. . . alternately according to the following rules:

Knowing n

2k

, / chooses any integer n

2k+1

such that

n

2k

≤ n

2k+1

≤ n

2

2k

.

Knowing n

2k+1

, B chooses any integer n

2k+2

such that

n

2k+1

n

2k+2

1.32. 32

ND

IMO, SIGTUNA, SWEDEN, 1991 37

is a prime raised to a positive integer power.

Player / wins the game by choosing the number 1990; player B wins by choosing the

number 1. For which n

0

does:

(a) / have a winning strategy?

(b) B have a winning strategy?

(c) Neither player have a winning strategy?

6. Prove that there exists a convex 1990-gon with the following two properties:

(a) All angles are equal.

(b) The lengths of the 1990 sides are the numbers 1

2

, 2

2

, 3

2

, . . . , 1990

2

in some

order.

1.32 32

nd

IMO, Sigtuna, Sweden, 1991

1. Given a triangle ABC, let I be the center of its inscribed circle. The internal

bisectors of the angles A, B, C meet the opposite sides in A

, B

, C

respectively.

Prove that

1

4

<

AI BI CI

AA

BB

CC

≤

8

27

2. Let n > 6 be an integer and a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

k

be all the natural numbers less than n

and relatively prime to n. If

a

2

−a

1

= a

3

−a

2

= = a

k

−a

k−1

> 0

prove that n must be either a prime number or a power of 2.

3. Let S = ¦1, 2, 3, . . . , 280¦. Find the smallest integer n such that each n-element

subset of S contains ﬁve numbers which are pairwise relatively prime.

4. Suppose G is a connected graph with k edges. Prove that it is possible to label

the edges 1, 2, . . . , k in such a way that at each vertex which belongs to two or more

edges, the greatest common divisor of the integers labeling those edges is equal to 1.

[A graph consists of a set of points, called vertices, together with a set of edges

joining certain pairs of distinct vertices. Each pair of vertices u, v belongs to at

most one edge. The graph G is connected if for each pair of distinct vertices x, y

there is some sequence of vertices x = v

0

, v

1

, v

2

, . . . , v

m

= y such that each pair

v

i

, v

i+1

(0 ≤ i < m) is joined by an edge of G.]

38 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

5. Let ´ABC be a triangle and P an interior point of ´ABC. Show that at least one

of the angles PAB, PBC, PCA is less than or equal to 30

◦

.

6. An inﬁnite sequence x

0

, x

1

, x

2

, . . . of real numbers is said to be bounded if there is a

constant C such that [x

i

[ ≤ C for every i ≥ 0.

Given any real number a > 1, construct a bounded inﬁnite sequence x

0

, x

1

, x

2

, . . .

such that

[x

i

−x

j

[[i −j[

a

≥ 1

for every pair of distinct nonnegative integers i, j.

1.33 33

rd

IMO, Moscow, Russia, 1992

1. Find all integers a, b, c with 1 < a < b < c such that

(a −1)(b −1)(c −1) is a divisor of abc −1

2. Let R denote the set of all real numbers. Find all functions f : R → R such that

f

x

2

+f(y)

= y + (f(x))

2

forall x, y ∈ R

3. Consider nine points in space, no four of which are coplanar. Each pair of points is

joined by an edge (that is, a line segment) and each edge is either colored blue or red

or left uncolored. Find the smallest value of n such that whenever exactly n edges

are colored, the set of colored edges necessarily contains a triangle all of whose edges

have the same color.

4. In the plane let C be a circle, L a line tangent to the circle C, and M a point

on L. Find the locus of all points P with the following property: there exists two

points Q, R on L such that M is the midpoint of QR and C is the inscribed circle

of triangle ´PQR.

5. Let S be a ﬁnite set of points in three-dimensional space. Let S

x

, S

y

, S

z

be the

sets consisting of the orthogonal projections of the points of S onto the yz-plane,

zx-plane, xy -plane, respectively. Prove that

[S[

2

≤ [S

x

[ [S

y

[ [S

z

[

where [A[ denotes the number of elements in the ﬁnite set [A[. (Note: The orthogonal

projection of a point onto a plane is the foot of the perpendicular from that point to

the plane.)

1.34. 34

TH

IMO, ISTAMBUL, TURKEY, 1993 39

6. For each positive integer n, S(n) is deﬁned to be the greatest integer such that, for

every positive integer k ≤ S(n), n

2

can be written as the sum of k positive squares.

(a) Prove that S(n) ≤ n

2

−14 for each n ≥ 4.

(b) Find an integer n such that S(n) = n

2

−14.

(c) Prove that there are inﬁntely many integers n such that S(n) = n

2

−14.

1.34 34

th

IMO, Istambul, Turkey, 1993

1. Let f(x) = x

n

+ 5x

n−1

+ 3, where n > 1 is an integer. Prove that f(x) cannot be

expressed as the product of two nonconstant polynomials with integer coeﬃcients.

2. Let D be a point inside acute triangle ABC such that ∠ADB = ACB + π/2 and

AC BD = AD BC.

(a) Calculate the ratio (AB CD)/(AC BD).

(b) Prove that the tangents at C to the circumcircles of ´ACD and ´BCD are

perpendicular.

3. On an inﬁnite chessboard, a game is played as follows. At the start, n

2

pieces are

arranged on the chessboard in an n by n block of adjoining squares, one piece in each

square. A move in the game is a jump in a horizontal or vertical direction over an

adjacent occupied square to an unoccupied square immediately beyond. The piece

which has been jumped over is removed.

Find those values of n for which the game can end with only one piece remaining on

the board.

4. For three points P, Q, R in the plane, we deﬁne m(PQR) as the minimum length of

the three altitudes of ´PQR. (If the points are collinear, we set m(PQR) = 0.)

Prove that for points A, B, C, X in the plane,

m(ABC) ≤ m(ABX) +m(AXC) +m(XBC)

5. Does there exist a function f : N → N such that f(1) = 2, f(f(n)) = f(n) + n for

all n ∈ N, and f(n) < f(n + 1) for all n ∈ N?

40 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

6. There are n lamps L

0

, . . . , L

n−1

in a circle (n > 1), where we denote L

n+k

= L

k

. (A

lamp at all times is either on or oﬀ.) Perform steps s

0

, s

1

, . . . as follows: at step s

i

, if

L

i−1

is lit, switch L

i

from on to oﬀ or vice versa, otherwise do nothing. Initially all

lamps are on. Show that:

(a) There is a positive integer M(n) such that after M(n) steps all the lamps are

on again;

(b) If n = 2

k

, we can take M(n) = n

2

−1;

(c) If n = 2

k

+ 1, we can take M(n) = n

2

−n + 1.

1.35 35

th

IMO, Hong Kong, 1994

1. Let mand n be positive integers. Let a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

m

be distinct elements of ¦1, 2, . . . , n¦

such that whenever a

i

+a

j

≤ n for some i, j, 1 ≤ i ≤ j ≤ m, there exists k, 1 ≤ k ≤ m,

with a

i

+a

j

= a

k

. Prove that

a

1

+a

2

+ +a

m

m

≥

n + 1

2

2. ´ABC is an isosceles triangle with AB = AC. Suppose that

(a) M is the midpoint of BC and O is the point on the line AM such that OB is

perpendicular to AB;

(b) Q is an arbitrary point on the segment BC diﬀerent from B and C;

(c) E lies on the line AB and F lies on the line AC such that E , Q, F are distinct

and collinear.

Prove that OQ is perpendicular to EF if and only if QE = QF.

3. For any positive integer k, let f(k) be the number of elements in the set ¦k + 1, k +

2, . . . , 2k¦ whose base 2 representation has precisely three 1s.

(a) Prove that, for each positive integer m, there exists at least onepositive integer

k such that f(k) = m.

(b) Determine all positive integers m for which there exists exactly one k with

f(k) = m.

1.36. 36

TH

IMO, TORONTO, CANADA, 1995 41

4. Determine all ordered pairs (m, n) of positive integers such that

n

3

+ 1

mn −1

is an integer.

5. Let S be the set of real numbers strictly greater than −1. Find all functions f : S → S

satisfying the two conditions:

(a) f(x +f(y) +xf(y)) = y +f(x) +yf(x) for all x and y in S;

(b)

f(x)

x

is strictly increasing on each of the intervals −1 < x < 0 and 0 < x.

6. Show that there exists a set A of positive integers with the following property: For

any inﬁnite set S of primes there exist two positive integers m ∈ A and n / ∈ A each

of which is a product of k distinct elements of S for some k ≥ 2.

1.36 36

th

IMO, Toronto, Canada, 1995

1. Let A, B, C, D be four distinct points on a line, in that order. The circles with

diameters AC and BD intersect at X and Y . The line XY meets BC at Z. Let

P be a point on the line XY other than Z. The line CP intersects the circle with

diameter AC at C and M, and the line BP intersects the circle with diameter BD

at B and N. Prove that the lines AM, DN, XY are concurrent.

2. Let a, b, c be positive real numbers such that abc = 1. Prove that

1

a

3

(b +c)

+

1

b

3

(c +a)

+

1

c

3

(a +b)

≥

3

2

3. Determine all integers n > 3 for which there exist n points A

1

, . . . , A

n

in the plane,

no three collinear, and real numbers r

1

, . . . , r

n

such that for 1 ≤ i < j < k ≤ n, the

area of ´A

i

A

j

A

k

is r

i

+r

j

+r

k

.

4. Find the maximum value of x

0

for which there exists a sequence x

0

, x

1

. . . , x

1995

of

positive reals with x

0

= x

1995

, such that for i = 1, . . . , 1995,

x

i−1

+

2

x

i−1

= 2x

i

+

1

x

i

42 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

5. Let ABCDEF be a convex hexagon with AB = BC = CD and DE = EF = FA,

such that BCD = EFA = π/3. Suppose G and H are points in theinterior of the

hexagon such that AGB = DHE = 2π/3. Provethat AG + GB + GH + DH +

HE ≥ CF.

6. Let p be an odd prime number. How many p-element subsets A of ¦1, 2, . . . 2p¦ are

there, the sum of whose elements is divisible by p?

1.37 37

th

IMO, Mumbai, India, 1996

1. We are given a positive integer r and a rectangular board ABCD with dimensions

[AB[ = 20, [BC[ = 12. The rectangle is divided into a grid of 20 12 unit squares.

The following moves are permitted on the board: one can move from one square to

another only if the distance between the centers of the two squares is

√

r. The task is

to ﬁnd a sequence of moves leading from the square with A as a vertex to the square

with B as a vertex.

(a) Show that the task cannot be done if r is divisible by 2 or 3.

(b) Prove that the task is possible when r = 73.

(c) Can the task be done when r = 97?

2. Let P be a point inside triangle ´ABC such that

APB −ACB = APC −ABC

Let D, E be the incenters of triangles APB, APC, respectively. Show that AP, BD, CE

meet at a point.

3. Let S denote the set of nonnegative integers. Find all functions f from S to itself

such that

f(m+f(n)) = f(f(m)) +f(n) ∀m, n ∈ S

4. The positive integers a and b are such that the numbers 15a +16b and 16a −15b are

both squares of positive integers. What is the least possible value that can be taken

on by the smaller of these two squares?

5. Let ABCDEF be a convex hexagon such that AB is parallel to DE, BC is parallel

to EF, and CD is parallel to FA. Let R

A

, R

C

, R

E

denote the circumradii of trian-

gles FAB, BCD, DEF, respectively, and let P denote the perimeter of the hexagon.

1.38. 38

TH

IMO, MAR DEL PLATA, ARGENTINA, 1997 43

Prove that

R

A

+R

C

+R

E

≥

P

2

6. Let p, q, n be three positive integers with p+q < n. Let (x

0

, x

1

, . . . , x

n

) be an (n+1)-

tuple of integers satisfying the following conditions:

(a) x

0

= x

n

= 0.

(b) For each i with 1 ≤ i ≤ n, either x

i

−x

i−1

= p or x

i

−x

i−1

= −q.

Show that there exist indices i < j with (i, j) = (0, n), such that x

i

= x

j

.

1.38 38

th

IMO, Mar del Plata, Argentina, 1997

1. In the plane the points with integer coordinates are the vertices of unit squares. The

squares are colored alternately black and white (as on a chessboard). For any pair of

positive integers m and n, consider a right-angled triangle whose vertices have integer

coordinates and whose legs, of lengths m and n,ie along edges of the squares.

Let S

1

be the total area of the black part of the triangle and S

2

be the total area of

thehite part. Let

f(m, n) = [S

1

−S

2

[

(a) Calculate f(m, n) for all positive integers m and n which are eitheroth even or

both odd.

(b) Prove that f(m, n) ≤

1

2

max¦m, n¦ for all m and n.

(c) Show that there is no constant C such that f(m, n) < C for all m and n.

endenumerate

2. The angle at A is the smallest angle of triangle ´ABC. The points B and C divide

the circumcircle of the triangle into two arcs. Let U be an interior point of the arc

between B and C which does not contain A. The perpendicular bisectors of AB and

AC meet the line AU at V and W, respectively. The lines BV and CW meet at T.

Show that

AU = TB +TC

3. Let x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

be real numbers satisfying the conditions

[x

1

+x

2

+ +x

n

[ = 1

44 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

and

[x

i

[ ≤

n + 1

2

i = 1, 2, . . . , n

Show that there exists a permutation y

1

, y

2

, . . . , y

n

of x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

such that

[y

1

+ 2y

2

+ +ny

n

[ ≤

n + 1

2

4. An n n matrix whose entries come from the set S = ¦1, 2, . . . , 2n − 1¦ is called

a silver matrix if, for each i = 1, 2, . . . , n, the ith row and the ith column together

contain all elements of S. Show that

(a) there is no silver matrix for n = 1997;

(b) silver matrices exist for inﬁnitely many values of n.

5. Find all pairs (a, b) of integers a, b ≥ 1 that satisfy the equation

a

b

2

= b

a

6. For each positive integer n , let f(n) denote the number of ways of representing n as

a sum of powers of 2 with nonnegative integer exponents.epresentations which diﬀer

only in the ordering of their summands are considered to be the same. For instance,

f(4) = 4, because the number 4 can be represented in the following four ways:

4; 2 + 2; 2 + 1 + 1; 1 + 1 + 1 + 1.

Prove that, for any integer n ≥ 3,

2

n

2

/4

< f(2

n

) < 2

n

2

/2

.

1.39 39

th

IMO, Taipei, Taiwan, 1998

1. In the convex quadrilateral ABCD, the diagonals AC and BD are perpendicular and

the opposite sides AB and DC are not parallel. Suppose that the point P, where the

perpendicular bisectors of AB and DC meet, is inside ABCD. Prove that ABCD is

a cyclic quadrilateral if and only if the triangles ABP and CDP have equal areas.

2. In a competition, there are a contestants and b judges, where b ≥ 3 is an odd integer.

Each judge rates each contestant as either pass or fail. Suppose k is a number such

that, for any two judges, their ratings coincide for at most k contestants. Prove that

k/a ≥ (b −1)/(2b).

1.40. 40

TH

IMO, BUCHAREST, ROMANIA, 1999 45

3. For any positive integer n, let d(n) denote the number of positive divisors of n (in-

cluding 1 and n itself). Determine all positive integers k such that d(n

2

)/d(n) = k

for some n.

4. Determine all pairs (a, b) of positive integers such that ab

2

+b +7 divides a

2

b +a +b.

5. Let I be the incenter of triangle ABC. Let the incircle of ABC touch the sides BC,

CA, and AB at K, L, and M, respectively. The line through B parallel to MK

meets the lines LM and LK at R and S, respectively. Prove that angle RIS is acute.

6. Consider all functions f from the set N of all positive integers into itself satisfying

f(t

2

f(s)) = s(f(t))

2

for all s and t in N. Determine the least possible value of

f(1998).

1.40 40

th

IMO, Bucharest, Romania, 1999

1. Determine all ﬁnite sets S of at least three points in the plane which satisfy the

following condition:

for any two distinct points A and B in S, the perpendicular bisector of the

line segment AB is an axis of symmetry for S.

2. Let n be a ﬁxed integer, with n ≥ 2.

(a) Determine the least constant C such that the inequality

¸

1≤i<j≤n

x

i

x

j

(x

2

i

+x

2

j

) ≤ C

¸

¸

1≤i≤n

x

i

¸

4

holds for all real numbers x

1

, , x

n

≥ 0.

(b) For this constant C, determine when equality holds.

3. Consider an n n square board, where n is a ﬁxed even positive integer. The board

is divided into n

2

unit squares. We say that two diﬀerent squares on the board are

adjacent if they have a common side.

N unit squares on the board are marked in such a way that every square (marked or

unmarked) on the board is adjacent to at least one marked square.

Determine the smallest possible value of N.

46 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

4. Determine all pairs (n, p) of positive integers such that

p is a prime,

n not exceeded 2p, and

(p −1)

n

+ 1 is divisible by n

p−1

.

5. Two circles G

1

and G

2

are contained inside the circle G, and are tangent to G at the

distinct points M and N, respectively. G

1

passes through the center of G

2

. The line

passing through the two points of intersection of G

1

and G

2

meets G at A and B.

The lines MA and MB meet G

1

at C and D, respectively.

Prove that CD is tangent to G

2

.

6. Determine all functions f : R −→R such that

f(x −f(y)) = f(f(y)) +xf(y) +f(x) −1

for all real numbers x, y.

1.41 41

st

IMO, Taejon, South Korea, 2000

1. Two circles ω

1

and ω

2

intersect at M and N. Line is tangent to the circles at A

and B, respectively, so that M lies closer to than N. Line CD, with C on ω

1

and

D on ω

2

, is parallel to and passes through M. Let lines AC and BD meet at E;

let lines AN and CD meet at P; and let lines BN and CD meet at Q. Prove that

EP = EQ.

2. Let a, b, c be positive real numbers such that abc = 1. Prove that:

a −1 +

1

b

b −1 +

1

c

c −1 +

1

a

≤ 1

3. Let n ≥ 2 be a positive integer. Initially, there are n ﬂeas on a horizontal line, not

all at the same point.

For a positive real number λ, deﬁne a move as follows:

choose any two ﬂeas at points A and B, with A to the left of B; let the ﬂea

at A jump to the point C on the line to the right of B with

BC

AB

= λ.

Determine all the values of λ such that for any point M on the line and any initial

position of the n ﬂeas, there is a sequence of moves that will take all the ﬂeas to the

position to the right of M.

1.42. 42

ND

IMO, WASHINGTON DC, USA, 2001 47

4. A magician has one hundred cards numbered 1 to 100. He puts them into three boxes,

a red one, a white one and a blue one, so that each box contain at least one card.

A member of the audience selects two of the three boxes, choose one card from each

and announces the sum of the numbers on the chosen cards. Given this sum, the

magician identiﬁes the box from which no card has been choosen.

How many ways are there to put all the cards into the boxes so that this trick always

works? (Two ways are considered diferent if at least one of card is put nto a diﬀerent

box)

5. Determine whether or not there exists a positive integer n such that:

n is divisible by exactely 2000 diﬀerent prime numbers, and

2

n

+ 1 is divisible by n.

6. Let AH

1

, BH

2

, CH

3

be the altitudes of an acute-angled triangle ´ABC. The incircle

of the triangle ´ABC touches the sides BC, CA, AB at T

1

, T

2

, T

3

, respectively. Let

the lines

1

,

2

,

3

be the reﬂections of the lines H

2

H

3

, H

3

H

1

H

1

H

2

in the lines T

2

T

3

,

T

3

T

1

, T

1

T

2

, respectively.

Prove that

1

,

2

,

3

determine a triangle whose vertices lie on the incircle of the

triangle ´ABC.

1.42 42

nd

IMO, Washington DC, USA, 2001

1. Let ´ABC be an acute-angled triangle with circumcentre O. Let P on BC be the

foot of the altitude from A. Suppose that BCA ≥ ABC + 30

◦

. Prove that

CAB +COP < 90

◦

2. Prove that

a

√

a

2

+ 8bc

+

b

√

b

2

+ 8ca

+

c

√

c

2

+ 8ab

≥ 1

for all positive real numbers a, b and c.

3. Twenty-one girls and twenty-one boys took part in a mathematical contest.

• Each contestant solved at most six problems.

• For each girl and each boy, at least one problem was solved by both of them

Prove that there was a problem that was solved by at least three girls and at least

three boys.

48 CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD

4. Let n be an odd integer greater than 1, and let k

1

, k

2

, . . . , k

n

be given integers. For

each of the n! permutations a = (a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

) of 1, 2, . . . , n, let

S (a) =

n

¸

i=1

k

i

a

i

Prove that there are two permutations b and c, such that n! is a divisor of S (b)−S (c).

5. In a triangle ´ABC, let AP bisect BAC, with P on BC, and let BQ bisect ABC,

with Q on CA. It is known that BAC = 60

◦

and that AB + BP = AQ + QB.

What are the possible angles of triangle ´ABC?

6. Let a, b, c, d be integers with a > b > c > d > 0. Suppose that

ac +bd = (b +d +a −c) (b +d −a +c)

Prove ab +cd is not a prime.

1.43 43

rd

IMO, Glascow, United Kingdom, 2002

1. S is the set of all (h, k) with h, k non-negative integers such that h + k < n. Each

element of S is colored red or blue, so that if (h, k) is red and h

≤ h, k

≤ k, then

(h

, k

**) is also red. A type 1 subset of S has n blue elements with diﬀerent ﬁrst
**

member and a type 2 subset of S has n blue elements with diﬀerent second member.

Show that there are the same number of type 1 and type 2 subsets.

2. BC is a diameter of a circle center O. A is any point on the circle with ∠AOC >

60

o

. EF is the chord which is the perpendicular bisector of AO. D is the midpoint of

the minor arc AB. The line through O parallel to AD meets AC at J. Show that J

is the incenter of triangle CEF.

3. Find all pairs of integers m > 2, n > 2 such that there are inﬁnitely many positive

integers k for which k

n

+k

2

−1 divides k

m

+k −1.

4. The positive divisors of the integer n > 1 are d

1

< d

2

< . . . < d

k

, so that d

1

= 1, d

k

=

n. Let d = d

1

d

2

+d

2

d

3

+ +d

k−1

d

k

.

(a) Prove that D < n

2

.

(b) Determine all n for which D is a divisor of n

2

.

1.44. 44

TH

IMO, TOKYO, JAPAN, 2003 49

5. Find all functions f from the set R of real numbers to itself such that

(f(x) +f(z))(f(y) +f(t)) = f(xy −zt) +f(xt +yz)

for all x, y, z, t in R.

6. n > 2 circles of radius 1 are drawn in the plane so that no line meets more than two

of the circles. Their centers are O

1

, O

2

, , O

n

. Show that

¸

1≤i<j≤n

1

O

i

O

j

≤

(n−1)π

4

1.44 44

th

IMO, Tokyo, Japan, 2003

1. Let A be a 101-element subset of the set S = ¦1, 2, . . . , 1000000¦. Prove that there

exist numbers t

1

, t

2

, . . . , t

100

in S such that the sets

A

j

= ¦x +t

j

[ x ∈ A¦ j = 1, 2, . . . , 100

are pairwise disjoint.

2. Find all pairs (m, n) of positive integers such that

m

2

2mn

2

−n

3

+1

is a positive integer.

3. A convex hexagon is given in which any two opposite sides have the following property:

the distance between their midpoints is

√

3/2 times the sum of their lengths. Prove

that all the angles of the hexagon are equal.

(A convex ABCDEF has three pairs of opposite sides: AB and DE, BC and EF,

CD and FA.)

4. Let ABCD be a cyclic quadrilateral. Let P, Q and R be the feet of perpendiculars

from D to lines BC, CA and AB, respectively. Showhat PQ = QR if and only if the

bisectors of angles ABC and ADC meet on segment AC.

5. Let n be a positive integer and x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

be real numbers with x

1

≤ x

2

≤ . . . ≤ x

n

.

(a) Prove that

¸

n

¸

i=1

n

¸

j=1

[x

i

−x

j

[

¸

2

≤

2(n

2

−1)

3

n

¸

i=1

n

¸

j=1

(x

i

−x

j

)

2

(b) Show that the equality holds if and only if x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

form an arithmetic

sequence.

6. Show that for each prime p, there exists a prime q such that n

p

− p is not divisible

by q for any positive integer n.

Chapter 2

William Lowell Putnam Competition

2.1 46

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1985

1. Determine, with proof, the number of ordered triples (A

1

, A

2

, A

3

) of sets which have

the property that

(i) A

1

∪ A

2

∪ A

3

= ¦1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10¦, and

(ii) A

1

∩ A

2

∩ A

3

= ∅.

Express your answer in the form 2

a

3

b

5

c

7

d

, where a, b, c, d are nonnegative integers.

2. Let T be an acute triangle. Inscribe a rectangle R in T with one side along a side of

T. Then inscribe a rectangle S in the triangle formed by the side of R opposite the

side on the boundary of T, and the other two sides of T, with one side along the side

of R. For any polygon X, let A(X) denote the area of X. Find the maximum value,

or show that no maximum exists, of

A(R)+A(S)

A(T)

, where T ranges over all triangles and

R, S over all rectangles as above.

3. Let d be a real number. For each integer m ≥ 0, deﬁne a sequence ¦a

m

(j)¦, j =

0, 1, 2, . . . by the condition

a

m

(0) = d/2

m

,

a

m

(j + 1) = (a

m

(j))

2

+ 2a

m

(j), j ≥ 0.

Evaluate lim

n→∞

a

n

(n).

50

2.1. 46

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1985 51

4. Deﬁne a sequence ¦a

i

¦ by a

1

= 3 and a

i+1

= 3

a

i

for i ≥ 1. Which integers between

00 and 99 inclusive occur as the last two digits in the decimal expansion of inﬁnitely

many a

i

?

5. Let I

m

=

2π

0

cos(x) cos(2x) cos(mx) dx. For which integers m, 1 ≤ m ≤ 10 is

I

m

= 0?

6. If p(x) = a

0

+a

1

x + +a

m

x

m

is a polynomial with real coeﬃcients a

i

, then set

Γ(p(x)) = a

2

0

+a

2

1

+ +a

2

m

.

Let F(x) = 3x

2

+ 7x + 2. Find, with proof, a polynomial g(x) with real coeﬃcients

such that

(i) g(0) = 1, and

(ii) Γ(f(x)

n

) = Γ(g(x)

n

)

for every integer n ≥ 1.

7. Let k be the smallest positive integer for which there exist distinct integers m

1

, m

2

, m

3

, m

4

, m

5

such that the polynomial

p(x) = (x −m

1

)(x −m

2

)(x −m

3

)(x −m

4

)(x −m

5

)

has exactly k nonzero coeﬃcients. Find, with proof, a set of integers m

1

, m

2

, m

3

, m

4

, m

5

for which this minimum k is achieved.

8. Deﬁne polynomials f

n

(x) for n ≥ 0 by f

0

(x) = 1, f

n

(0) = 0 for n ≥ 1, and

d

dx

f

n+1

(x) = (n + 1)f

n

(x + 1)

for n ≥ 0. Find, with proof, the explicit factorization of f

100

(1) into powers of distinct

primes.

9. Let

a

1,1

a

1,2

a

1,3

. . .

a

2,1

a

2,2

a

2,3

. . .

a

3,1

a

3,2

a

3,3

. . .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

be a doubly inﬁnite array of positive integers, and suppose each positive integer

appears exactly eight times in the array. Prove that a

m,n

> mn for some pair of

positive integers (m, n).

52 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

10. Let C be the unit circle x

2

+y

2

= 1. A point p is chosen randomly on the circumference

C and another point q is chosen randomly from the interior of C (these points are

chosen independently and uniformly over their domains). Let R be the rectangle with

sides parallel to the x and y-axes with diagonal pq. What is the probability that no

point of R lies outside of C?

11. Evaluate

∞

0

t

−1/2

e

−1985(t+t

−1

)

dt. You may assume that

∞

−∞

e

−x

2

dx =

√

π.

12. Let G be a ﬁnite set of real n n matrices ¦M

i

¦, 1 ≤ i ≤ r, which form a group

under matrix multiplication. Suppose that

¸

r

i=1

tr(M

i

) = 0, where tr(A) denotes the

trace of the matrix A. Prove that

¸

r

i=1

M

i

is the n n zero matrix.

2.2 47

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1986

1. Find, with explanation, the maximum value of f(x) = x

3

− 3x on the set of all real

numbers x satisfying x

4

+ 36 ≤ 13x

2

.

2. What is the units (i.e., rightmost) digit of

¸

10

20000

10

100

+ 3

¸

?

3. Evaluate

¸

∞

n=0

Arccot(n

2

+n + 1), where Arccot t for t ≥ 0 denotes the number θ in

the interval 0 < θ ≤ π/2 with cot θ = t.

4. A transversal of an nn matrix A consists of n entries of A, no two in the same row

or column. Let f(n) be the number of n n matrices A satisfying the following two

conditions:

(a) Each entry α

i,j

of A is in the set ¦−1, 0, 1¦.

(b) The sum of the n entries of a transversal is the same for all transversals of A.

An example of such a matrix A is

A =

¸

¸

−1 0 −1

0 1 0

0 1 0

¸

.

2.2. 47

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1986 53

Determine with proof a formula for f(n) of the form

f(n) = a

1

b

n

1

+a

2

b

n

2

+a

3

b

n

3

+a

4

,

where the a

i

’s and b

i

’s are rational numbers.

5. Suppose f

1

(x), f

2

(x), . . . , f

n

(x) are functions of n real variables x = (x

1

, . . . , x

n

) with

continuous second-order partial derivatives everywhere on R

n

. Suppose further that

there are constants c

ij

such that

∂f

i

∂x

j

−

∂f

j

∂x

i

= c

ij

for all i and j, 1 ≤ i ≤ n, 1 ≤ j ≤ n. Prove that there is a function g(x) on R

n

such

that f

i

+∂g/∂x

i

is linear for all i, 1 ≤ i ≤ n. (A linear function is one of the form

a

0

+a

1

x

1

+a

2

x

2

+ +a

n

x

n

.)

6. Let a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

be real numbers, and let b

1

, b

2

, . . . , b

n

be distinct positive integers.

Suppose that there is a polynomial f(x) satisfying the identity

(1 −x)

n

f(x) = 1 +

n

¸

i=1

a

i

x

b

i

.

Find a simple expression (not involving any sums) for f(1) in terms of b

1

, b

2

, . . . , b

n

and n (but independent of a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

).

7. Inscribe a rectangle of base b and height h in a circle of radius one, and inscribe

an isosceles triangle in the region of the circle cut oﬀ by one base of the rectangle

(with that side as the base of the triangle). For what value of h do the rectangle and

triangle have the same area?

8. Prove that there are only a ﬁnite number of possibilities for the ordered triple T =

(x − y, y − z, z − x), where x, y, z are complex numbers satisfying the simultaneous

equations

x(x −1) + 2yz = y(y −1) + 2zx +z(z −1) + 2xy,

and list all such triples T.

9. Let Γ consist of all polynomials in x with integer coeﬃcienst. For f and g in Γ and

m a positive integer, let f ≡ g (mod m) mean that every coeﬃcient of f − g is an

integral multiple of m. Let n and p be positive integers with p prime. Given that

f, g, h, r and s are in Γ with rf + sg ≡ 1 (mod p) and fg ≡ h (mod p), prove

that there exist F and G in Γ with F ≡ f (mod p), G ≡ g (mod p), and FG ≡ h

(mod p

n

).

54 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

10. For a positive real number r, let G(r) be the minimum value of [r −

√

m

2

+ 2n

2

[ for

all integers m and n. Prove or disprove the assertion that lim

r→∞

G(r) exists and

equals 0.

11. Let f(x, y, z) = x

2

+y

2

+z

2

+xyz. Let p(x, y, z), q(x, y, z), r(x, y, z) be polynomials

with real coeﬃcients satisfying

f(p(x, y, z), q(x, y, z), r(x, y, z)) = f(x, y, z).

Prove or disprove the assertion that the sequence p, q, r consists of some permutation

of ±x, ±y, ±z, where the number of minus signs is 0 or 2.

12. Suppose A, B, C, D are n n matrices with entries in a ﬁeld F, satisfying the condi-

tions that AB

T

andCD

T

are symmetric and AD

T

− BC

T

= I. Here I is the n n

identity matrix, and if M is an n n matrix, M

T

is its transpose. Prove that

A

T

D +C

T

B = I.

2.3 48

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1987

1. Curves A, B, C and D are deﬁned in the plane as follows:

A =

(x, y) : x

2

−y

2

=

x

x

2

+y

2

¸

,

B =

(x, y) : 2xy +

y

x

2

+y

2

= 3

¸

,

C =

(x, y) : x

3

−3xy

2

+ 3y = 1

¸

,

D =

(x, y) : 3x

2

y −3x −y

3

= 0

¸

.

Prove that A ∩ B = C ∩ D.

2. The sequence of digits

123456789101112131415161718192021 . . .

is obtained by writing the positive integers in order. If the 10

n

-th digit in this sequence

occurs in the part of the sequence in which the m-digit numbers are placed, deﬁne

f(n) to be m. For example, f(2) = 2 because the 100th digit enters the sequence in

the placement of the two-digit integer 55. Find, with proof, f(1987).

2.3. 48

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1987 55

3. For all real x, the real-valued function y = f(x) satisﬁes

y

−2y

+y = 2e

x

.

(a) If f(x) > 0 for all real x, must f

**(x) > 0 for all real x? Explain.
**

(b) If f

**(x) > 0 for all real x, must f(x) > 0 for all real x? Explain.
**

4. Let P be a polynomial, with real coeﬃcients, in three variables and F be a function

of two variables such that

P(ux, uy, uz) = u

2

F(y −x, z −x) for all real x, y, z, u,

and such that P(1, 0, 0) = 4, P(0, 1, 0) = 5, and P(0, 0, 1) = 6. Also let A, B, C be

complex numbers with P(A, B, C) = 0 and [B −A[ = 10. Find [C −A[.

5. Let

G(x, y) =

−y

x

2

+ 4y

2

,

x

x

2

+ 4y

2

, 0

.

Prove or disprove that there is a vector-valued function

F(x, y, z) = (M(x, y, z), N(x, y, z), P(x, y, z))

with the following properties:

(i) M, N, P have continuous partial derivatives for all (x, y, z) = (0, 0, 0);

(ii) Curl

F =

0 for all (x, y, z) = (0, 0, 0);

(iii)

F(x, y, 0) =

G(x, y).

6. For each positive integer n, let a(n) be the number of zeroes in the base 3 represen-

tation of n. For which positive real numbers x does the series

∞

¸

n=1

x

a(n)

n

3

converge?

7. Evaluate

4

2

ln(9 −x) dx

ln(9 −x) +

ln(x + 3)

.

56 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

8. Let r, s and t be integers with 0 ≤ r, 0 ≤ s and r +s ≤ t. Prove that

s

0

t

r

+

s

1

t

r+1

+ +

s

s

t

r+s

=

t + 1

(t + 1 −s)

t−s

r

**9. Let F be a ﬁeld in which 1 + 1 = 0. Show that the set of solutions to the equation
**

x

2

+y

2

= 1 with x and y in F is given by (x, y) = (1, 0) and

(x, y) =

r

2

−1

r

2

+ 1

,

2r

r

2

+ 1

**where r runs through the elements of F such that r
**

2

= −1.

10. Let (x

1

, y

1

) = (0.8, 0.6) and let x

n+1

= x

n

cos y

n

− y

n

sin y

n

and y

n+1

= x

n

sin y

n

+

y

n

cos y

n

for n = 1, 2, 3, . . .. For each of lim

n→∞

x

n

and lim

n→∞

y

n

, prove that the

limit exists and ﬁnd it or prove that the limit does not exist.

11. Let O

n

be the n-dimensional vector (0, 0, , 0). Let M be a 2n n matrix of

complex numbers such that whenever (z

1

, z

2

, . . . , z

2n

)M = O

n

, with complex z

i

, not

all zero, then at least one of the z

i

is not real. Prove that for arbitrary real numbers

r

1

, r

2

, . . . , r

2n

, there are complex numbers w

1

, w

2

, . . . , w

n

such that

re

M

¸

¸

¸

w

1

.

.

.

w

n

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

=

¸

¸

¸

r

1

.

.

.

r

n

¸

.

(Note: if C is a matrix of complex numbers, re(C) is the matrix whose entries are

the real parts of the entries of C.)

12. Let F be the ﬁeld of p

2

elements, where p is an odd prime. Suppose S is a set of

(p

2

−1)/2 distinct nonzero elements of F with the property that for each a = 0 in F,

exactly one of a and −a is in S. Let N be the number of elements in the intersection

S ∩ ¦2a : a ∈ S¦. Prove that N is even.

2.4 49

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1988

1. Let R be the region consisting of the points (x, y) of the cartesian plane satisfying

both [x[ −[y[ ≤ 1 and [y[ ≤ 1. Sketch the region R and ﬁnd its area.

2.4. 49

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1988 57

2. A not uncommon calculus mistake is to believe that the product rule for derivatives

says that (fg)

= f

g

. If f(x) = e

x

2

, determine, with proof, whether there exists an

open interval (a, b) and a nonzero function g deﬁned on (a, b) such that this wrong

product rule is true for x in (a, b).

3. Determine, with proof, the set of real numbers x for which

∞

¸

n=1

1

n

csc

1

n

−1

x

converges.

4. (a) If every point of the plane is painted one of three colors, do there necessarily

exist two points of the same color exactly one inch apart?

(b) What if three is replaced by nine?

5. Prove that there exists a unique function f from the set R

+

of positive real numbers

to R

+

such that

f(f(x)) = 6x −f(x)

and

f(x) > 0

for all x > 0.

6. If a linear transformation A on an n-dimensional vector space has n +1 eigenvectors

such that any n of them are linearly independent, does it follow that A is a scalar

multiple of the identity? Prove your answer.

7. A composite (positive integer) is a product ab with a and b not necessarily distinct

integers in ¦2, 3, 4, . . .¦. Show that every composite is expressible as xy +xz +yz +1,

with x, y, z positive integers.

8. Prove or disprove: If x and y are real numbers with y ≥ 0 and y(y + 1) ≤ (x + 1)

2

,

then y(y −1) ≤ x

2

.

9. For every n in the set N = ¦1, 2, . . .¦ of positive integers, let r

n

be the minimum value

of [c − d

√

3[ for all nonnegative integers c and d with c + d = n. Find, with proof,

the smallest positive real number g with r

n

≤ g for all n ∈ N.

10. Prove that if

¸

∞

n=1

a

n

is a convergent series of positive real numbers, then so is

¸

∞

n=1

(a

n

)

n/(n+1)

.

58 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

11. For positive integers n, let M

n

be the 2n + 1 by 2n + 1 skew-symmetric matrix for

which each entry in the ﬁrst n subdiagonals below the main diagonal is 1 and each

of the remaining entries below the main diagonal is -1. Find, with proof, the rank

of M

n

. (According to one deﬁnition, the rank of a matrix is the largest k such that

there is a k k submatrix with nonzero determinant.)

One may note that

M

1

=

¸

¸

0 −1 1

1 0 −1

−1 1 0

¸

M

2

=

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

0 −1 −1 1 1

1 0 −1 −1 1

1 1 0 −1 −1

−1 1 1 0 −1

−1 −1 1 1 0

¸

**12. Prove that there exist an inﬁnite number of ordered pairs (a, b) of integers such that
**

for every positive integer t, the number at +b is a triangular number if and only if t

is a triangular number. (The triangular numbers are the t

n

= n(n + 1)/2 with n in

¦0, 1, 2, . . .¦)

2.5 50

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1989

1. How many primes among the positive integers, written as usual in base 10, are alter-

nating 1’s and 0’s, beginning and ending with 1?

2. Evaluate

a

0

b

0

e

max{b

2

x

2

,a

2

y

2

}

dy dx where a and b are positive.

3. Prove that if

11z

10

+ 10iz

9

+ 10iz −11 = 0,

then [z[ = 1. (Here z is a complex number and i

2

= −1.)

4. If α is an irrational number, 0 < α < 1, is there a ﬁnite game with an honest coin

such that the probability of one player winning the game is α? (An honest coin is one

for which the probability of heads and the probability of tails are both

1

2

. A game is

ﬁnite if with probability 1 it must end in a ﬁnite number of moves.)

2.5. 50

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1989 59

5. Let m be a positive integer and let ( be a regular (2m+1)-gon inscribed in the unit

circle. Show that there is a positive constant A, independent of m, with the following

property. For any points p inside ( there are two distinct vertices v

1

and v

2

of ( such

that

[ [p −v

1

[ −[p −v

2

[ [ <

1

m

−

A

m

3

.

Here [s −t[ denotes the distance between the points s and t.

6. Let α = 1 +a

1

x +a

2

x

2

+ be a formal power series with coeﬃcients in the ﬁeld of

two elements. Let

a

n

=

**1 if every block of zeros in the binary expansion of n
**

has an even number of zeros in the block

0 otherwise.

(For example, a

36

= 1 because 36 = 100100

2

and a

20

= 0 because 20 = 10100

2

.)

Prove that α

3

+xα + 1 = 0.

7. A dart, thrown at random, hits a square target. Assuming that any two parts of the

target of equal area are equally likely to be hit, ﬁnd the probability that the point hit

is nearer to the center than to any edge. Express your answer in the form

a

√

b +c

d

,

where a, b, c, d are integers.

8. Let S be a non-empty set with an associative operation that is left and right can-

cellative (xy = xz implies y = z, and yx = zx implies y = z).ssume that for every a

in S the set ¦a

n

: n = 1, 2, 3, . . .¦ is inite. Must S be a group?

9. Let f be a function on [0, ∞), diﬀerentiable and satisfying

f

(x) = −3f(x) + 6f(2x)

for x > 0. Assume that [f(x)[ ≤ e

−

√

x

for x ≥ 0 (so that f(x) tends rapidly to 0 as x

increases). For n a non-negative integer, deﬁne

µ

n

=

∞

0

x

n

f(x) dx

(sometimes called the nth moment of f).

a) Express µ

n

in terms of µ

0

.

b) Prove that the sequence ¦µ

n

3

n

n!

¦ always converges, and that the limit is 0 only

if µ

0

= 0.

60 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

10. Can a countably inﬁnite set have an uncountable collection of non-empty subsets such

that the intersection of any two of them is ﬁnite?

11. Label the vertices of a trapezoid T (quadrilateral with two parallel sides) inscribed

in the unit circle as A, B, C, D so that AB is parallel to CD and A, B, C, D are

in counterclockwise order. Let s

1

, s

2

, and d denote the lengths of the line segments

AB, CD, and OE, where E is the point of intersection of the diagonals of T, and O

is the center of the circle. Determine the least upper bound of

s

1

−s

2

d

over all such T

for which d = 0, and describe allases, if any, in which it is attained.

12. Let (x

1

, x

2

, . . . x

n

) be a point chosen at random from the n-dimensional region deﬁned

by 0 < x

1

< x

2

< < x

n

< 1. Let f be a continuous function on [0, 1] with f(1) = 0.

Set x

0

= 0 and x

n+1

= 1. Show that the expected value of the Riemann sum

n

¸

i=0

(x

i+1

−x

i

)f(x

i+1

)

is

1

0

f(t)P(t) dt, where P is a polynomial of degree n, independent of f, with 0 ≤

P(t) ≤ 1 for 0 ≤ t ≤ 1.

2.6 51

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1990

1. Let

T

0

= 2, T

1

= 3, T

2

= 6,

and for n ≥ 3,

T

n

= (n + 4)T

n−1

−4nT

n−2

+ (4n −8)T

n−3

.

The ﬁrst few terms are

2, 3, 6, 14, 40, 152, 784, 5168, 40576.

Find, with proof, a formula for T

n

of the form T

n

= A

n

+B

n

, where ¦A

n

¦ and ¦B

n

¦

are well-known sequences.

2. Is

√

2 the limit of a sequence of numbers of the form

3

√

n −

3

√

m (n, m = 0, 1, 2, . . .)?

3. Prove that any convex pentagon whose vertices (no three of which are collinear) have

integer coordinates must have area greater than or equal to

5

2

.

2.6. 51

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1990 61

4. Consider a paper punch that can be centered at any point of the plane and that,

when operated, removes from the plane precisely those points whose distance from

the center is irrational. How many punches are needed to remove every point?

5. If A and B are square matrices of the same size such that ABAB = 0, does it follow

that BABA = 0?

6. If X is a ﬁnite set, let X denote the number of elements in X. Call an ordered pair

(S, T) of subsets of ¦1, 2, . . . , n¦ admissible if s > [T[ for each s ∈ S, and t > [S[ for

each t ∈ T. How many admissible ordered pairs of subsets of ¦1, 2, . . . , 10¦ are there?

Prove your answer.

7. Find all real-valued continuously diﬀerentiable functions f on the real line such that

for all x,

(f(x))

2

=

x

0

[(f(t))

2

+ (f

(t))

2

] dt + 1990.

8. Prove that for [x[ < 1, [z[ > 1,

1 +

∞

¸

j=1

(1 +x

j

)P

j

= 0,

where P

j

is

(1 −z)(1 −zx)(1 −zx

2

) (1 −zx

j−1

)

(z −x)(z −x

2

)(z −x

3

) (z −x

j

)

.

9. Let S be a set of 22 integer matrices whose entries a

ij

(1) are all squares of integers

and, (2) satisfy a

ij

≤ 200. Show that if S has more than 50387 (= 15

4

−15

2

−15 +2)

elements, then it has two elements that commute.

10. Let G be a ﬁnite group of order n generated by a and b. Prove or disprove: there is

a sequence

g

1

, g

2

, g

3

, . . . , g

2n

such that

(1) every element of G occurs exactly twice, and

(2) g

i+1

equals g

i

a or g

i

b for i = 1, 2, . . . , 2n. (Interpret g

2n+1

as g

1

.)

11. Is there an inﬁnite sequence a

0

, a

1

, a

2

, . . . of nonzero real numbers such that for n =

1, 2, 3, . . . the polynomial

p

n

(x) = a

0

+a

1

x +a

2

x

2

+ +a

n

x

n

has exactly n distinct real roots?

62 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

12. Let S be a nonempty closed bounded convex set in the plane. Let K be a line and t

a positive number. Let L

1

and L

2

be support lines for S parallel to K

1

, and let L be

the line parallel to K and midway between L

1

and L

2

. Let B

S

(K, t) be the band of

points whose distance from L is at most (t/2)w, where w is the distance between L

1

and L

2

. What is the smallest t such that

S ∩

¸

K

B

S

(K, t) = ∅

for all S? (K runs over all lines in the plane.)

2.7 52

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1991

1. A 23 rectangle has vertices as (0, 0), (2, 0), (0, 3), and (2, 3). It rotates 90

◦

clockwise

about the point (2, 0). It then otates 90

◦

clockwise about the point (5, 0), then 90

◦

clockwise about the point (7, 0), and ﬁnally, 90

◦

clockwise about the point (10, 0).

(The side originally on the x-axis is now back on the x-axis.) Find the area of the

region above the x-axis and below the curve traced out by the point whose initial

position is (1,1).

2. Let A and B be diﬀerent nn matrices with real entries. If A

3

= B

3

and A

2

B = B

2

A,

can A

2

+B

2

be nvertible?

3. Find all real polynomials p(x) of degree n ≥ 2 for which there exist real numbers

r

1

< r

2

< < r

n

such that

(a) p(r

i

) = 0, i = 1, 2, . . . , n, and

(b) p

r

i

+r

i+1

2

= 0 i = 1, 2, . . . , n −1,

where p

**(x) denotes the derivative of p(x).
**

4. Does there exist an inﬁnite sequence of closed discs D

1

, D

2

, D

3

, . . . in the plane, with

centers c

1

, c

2

, c

3

, . . ., respectively, such that

(a) the c

i

have no limit point in the ﬁnite plane,

(b) the sum of the areas of the D

i

is ﬁnite, and

(c) every line in the plane intersects at least one of the D

i

?

2.7. 52

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1991 63

5. Find the maximum value of

y

0

x

4

+ (y −y

2

)

2

dx

for 0 ≤ y ≤ 1.

6. Let A(n) denote the number of sums of positive integers

a

1

+a

2

+ +a

r

which add up to n with

a

1

> a

2

+a

3

, a

2

> a

3

+a

4

, . . .

a

r−2

> a

r−1

+a

r

, a

r−1

> a

r

Let B(n) denote the number of b

1

+b

2

+ +b

s

which add up to n, with

(a) b

1

≥ b

2

≥ . . . ≥ b

s

,

(b) each b

i

is in the sequence 1, 2, 4, . . . , g

j

, . . . deﬁned by g

1

= 1, g

2

= 2, and

g

j

= g

j−1

+g

j−2

+ 1, and

(c) if b

1

= g

k

then every element in ¦1, 2, 4, . . . , g

k

¦ appears at least once as a b

i

.

Prove that A(n) = B(n) for each n ≥ 1.

(For example, A(7) = 5 because the relevant sums are 7, 6 +1, 5 +2, 4 +3, 4 +2 +1,

and B(7) = 5 because the relevant sums are 4 + 2 + 1, 2 + 2 + 2 + 1, 2 + 2 + 1 + 1 +

1, 2 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1, 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1.)

7. For each integer n ≥ 0, let S(n) = n − m

2

, where m is the greatest integer with

m

2

≤ n. Deﬁne a sequence (a

k

)

∞

k=0

by a

0

= A and a

k+1

= a

k

+S(a

k

) for k ≥ 0. For

what positive integers A is this sequence eventually constant?

8. Suppose f and g are non-constant, diﬀerentiable, real-valued functions deﬁned on

(−∞, ∞). Furthermore, suppose that for each pair of real numbers x and y,

f(x + y) = f(x)f(y) −g(x)g(y),

g(x + y) = f(x)g(y) +g(x)f(y).

If f

(0) = 0, prove that (f(x))

2

+ (g(x))

2

= 1 for all x.

9. Does there exist a real number L such that, if m and n are integers greater than L,

then an m n rectangle may be expressed as a nion of 4 6 and 5 7 rectangles,

any two of which intersect at most along their boundaries?

64 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

10. Suppose p is an odd prime. Prove that

p

¸

j=0

p

j

p +j

j

≡ 2

p

+ 1 (mod p

2

).

11. Let p be an odd prime and let Z

p

denote (the ﬁeld of) integers modulo p. How many

elements are in the set

¦x

2

: x ∈ Z

p

¦ ∩ ¦y

2

+ 1 : y ∈ Z

p

¦?

12. Let a and b be positive numbers. Find the largest number c, in terms of a and b, such

that

a

x

b

1−x

≤ a

sinh ux

sinh u

+b

sinh u(1 −x)

sinh u

for all u with 0 < [u[ ≤ c and for all x, 0 < x < 1. (Note: sinh u = (e

u

−e

−u

)/2.)

2.8 53

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1992

1. Prove that f(n) = 1 − n is the only integer-valued function deﬁned on the integers

that satisﬁes the following conditions.

(i) f(f(n)) = n, for all integers n;

(ii) f(f(n + 2) + 2) = n for all integers n;

(iii) f(0) = 1.

2. Deﬁne C(α) to be the coeﬃcient of x

1992

in the power series about x = 0 of (1 +x)

α

.

Evaluate

1

0

C(−y −1)

1992

¸

k=1

1

y +k

dy.

3. For a given positive integer m, ﬁnd all triples (n, x, y) of positive integers, with n

relatively prime to m, which satisfy

(x

2

+y

2

)

m

= (xy)

n

.

2.8. 53

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1992 65

4. Let f be an inﬁnitely diﬀerentiable real-valued function deﬁned on the real numbers.

If

f

1

n

=

n

2

n

2

+ 1

, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . ,

compute the values of the derivatives f

(k)

(0), k = 1, 2, 3, . . ..

5. For each positive integer n, let a

n

= 0 (or 1) if the number of 1’s in the binary

representation of n is even (or odd), respectively. Show that there do not exist

positive integers k and m such that

a

k+j

= a

k+m+j

= a

k+m+2j

,

for 0 ≤ j ≤ m−1.

6. Four points are chosen at random on the surface of a sphere. What is the probability

that the center of the sphere lies inside the tetrahedron whose vertices are at the

four points? (It is understood that each point is independently chosen relative to a

uniform distribution on the sphere.)

7. Let S be a set of n distinct real numbers. Let A

S

be the set of numbers that occur

as averages of two distinct elements of S. For a given n ≥ 2, what is the smallest

possible number of elements in A

S

?

8. For nonnegative integers n and k, deﬁne Q(n, k) to be the coeﬃcient of x

k

in the

expansion of (1 +x +x

2

+ x

3

)

n

. Prove that

Q(n, k) =

k

¸

j=0

n

j

n

k −2j

,

where

a

b

**is the standard binomial coeﬃcient. (Reminder: For integers a and b with
**

a ≥ 0,

a

b

=

a!

b!(a−b)!

for 0 ≤ b ≤ a, with

a

b

= 0 otherwise.)

9. For any pair (x, y) of real numbers, a sequence (a

n

(x, y))

n≥0

is deﬁned as follows:

a

0

(x, y) = x,

a

n+1

(x, y) =

(a

n

(x, y))

2

+y

2

2

, for n ≥ 0.

Find the area of the region

¦(x, y)[(a

n

(x, y))

n≥0

converges¦.

66 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

10. Let p(x) be a nonzero polynomial of degree less than 1992 having no nonconstant

factor in common with x

3

−x. Let

d

1992

dx

1992

p(x)

x

3

−x

=

f(x)

g(x)

for polynomials f(x) and g(x). Find the smallest possible degree of f(x).

11. Let D

n

denote the value of the (n −1) (n −1) determinant

3 1 1 1 1

1 4 1 1 1

1 1 5 1 1

1 1 1 6 1

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1 1 1 1 n + 1

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

.

Is the set

Dn

n!

¸

n≥2

bounded?

12. Let M be a set of real n n matrices such that

(i) I ∈ M, where I is the n n identity matrix;

(ii) if A ∈ M and B ∈ M, then either AB ∈ M or −AB ∈ M, but not both;

(iii) if A ∈ M and B ∈ M, then either AB = BA or AB = −BA;

(iv) if A ∈ M and A = I, there is at least one B ∈ M such that AB = −BA.

Prove that M contains at most n

2

matrices.

2.9 54

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1993

1. The horizontal line y = c intersects the curve y = 2x − 3x

3

in the ﬁrst quadrant as

in the ﬁgure. Find c so that the areas of the two shaded regions are equal. [Figure

not included. The ﬁrst region is bounded by the y-axis, the line y = c and the curve;

the other lies under the curve and above the line y = c between their two points of

intersection.]

2. Let (x

n

)

n≥0

be a sequence of nonzero real numbers such that x

2

n

−x

n−1

x

n+1

= 1 for

n = 1, 2, 3, . . .. Prove there exists a real number a such that x

n+1

= ax

n

− x

n−1

for

all n ≥ 1.

2.9. 54

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1993 67

3. Let {

n

be the set of subsets of ¦1, 2, . . . , n¦. Let c(n, m) be the number of functions

f : {

n

→ ¦1, 2, . . . , m¦ such that f(A∩ B) = min¦f(A), f(B)¦. Prove that

c(n, m) =

m

¸

j=1

j

n

.

4. Let x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

19

be positive integers each of which is less than or equal to 93. Let

y

1

, y

2

, . . . , y

93

be positive integers each of which is less than or equal to 19. Prove

that there exists a (nonempty) sum of some x

i

’s equal to a sum of some y

j

’s.

5. Show that

−10

−100

x

2

−x

x

3

−3x + 1

2

dx +

1

11

1

101

x

2

−x

x

3

−3x + 1

2

dx +

11

10

101

100

x

2

−x

x

3

−3x + 1

2

dx

is a rational number.

6. The inﬁnite sequence of 2’s and 3’s

2, 3, 3, 2, 3, 3, 3, 2, 3, 3, 3, 2, 3, 3, 2, 3, 3, 3, 2, 3, 3, 3, 2, 3, 3, 3, 2, 3, 3, 2, 3, 3, 3, 2, . . .

as the property that, if one forms a second sequence that records the number of 3’s

between successive 2’s, the result is identical to the iven sequence. Show that there

exists a real number r such that, for ny n, the nth term of the sequence is 2 if and

only if n = 1 + rm| for some nonnegative integer m. (Note: xrfloor denotes the

largest integer less than or equal to x.)

7. Find the smallest positive integer n such that for every integer m with 0 < m < 1993,

there exists an integer k for which

m

1993

<

k

n

<

m + 1

1994

.

8. Consider the following game played with a deck of 2n cards numbered from 1 to 2n.

The deck is randomly shuﬄed and n cards are dealt to each of two players. Beginning

with A, the players take turns discarding one of their remaining cards and announcing

its number. The game ends as soon as the sum of the numbers on the discarded cards

is divisible by 2n + 1. The last person to discard wins the game. Assuming optimal

strategy by both A and B, what is the probability that A wins?

9. Two real numbers x and y are chosen at random in the interval (0,1) with respect

to the uniform distribution. What is the probability that he closest integer to x/y is

even? Express the answer in the form r +sπ, where r and s are rational numbers.

68 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

10. The function K(x, y) is positive and continuous for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1, 0 ≤ y ≤ 1, and the

functions f(x) and g(x) are positive and continuous for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. Suppose that for

all x, 0 ≤ x ≤ 1,

1

0

f(y)K(x, y) dy = g(x)

and

1

0

g(y)K(x, y) dy = f(x).

Show that f(x) = g(x) for 9 ≤ x ≤ 1.

11. Show there do not exist four points in the Euclidean plane such that the pairwise

distances between the points are all odd integers.

12. Let S be a set of three, not necessarily distinct, positive integers. Show that one can

transform S into a set containing 0 by a ﬁnite number of applications of the following

rule: Select two of the three integers, say x and y, where x < y and replace them

with 2x and y −x.

2.10 55

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1994

1. Let (a

n

) be a sequence of positive reals such that, for all n, a

n

≤ a

2n

+a

2n+1

. Prove

that

¸

∞

n=1

a

n

diverges.

2. Find the positive value of m such that the area in the ﬁrst quadrant enclosed by the

ellipse

x

2

9

+ y

2

= 1, the x-axis, and the line y = 2x/3 is equal to the area in the ﬁrst

quadrant enclosed by the ellipse

x

2

9

+y

2

= 1, the y-axis, and the line y = mx.

3. Prove that the points of an isosceles triangle of side length 1 annot be colored in four

colors such that no two points at distance at least 2 −

√

2 from each other receive the

same color.

4. Let A and B be 2 2 matrices with integer entries such that each of A, A +B, A +

2B, A + 3B, A + 4B has an inverse with integer entries. Prove that the same must

be true of A+ 5B.

5. Let (r

n

) be a sequence of positive reals with limit 0. Let S be the set of all numbers

expressible in the form r

i

1

+ . . . + r

i

1994

for positive integers i

1

< i

2

< . . . < i

1994

.

Prove that every interval (a, b) contains a subinterval (c, d) whose intersection with

S is empty.

2.11. 56

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1995 69

6. Let f

1

, . . . , f

10

be bijections of the integers such that for every integer n, there exists

a sequence i

1

, . . . , i

k

for some k such that f

i

1

◦ . . . ◦ f

i

k

(0) = n. Prove that if A is

any nonempty ﬁnite set, there exist at most 512 sequences (e

1

, . . . , e

10

) of zeroes and

ones such that f

e

1

1

◦ . . . ◦ f

e

10

10

maps A to A. (Here f

1

= f and f

0

means the identity

function.)

7. Find all positive integers n such that [n − m

2

[ ≤ 250 for exactly 15 nonnegative

integers m.

8. Find all c such that the graph of the function x

4

+9x

3

+cx

2

+ax+b meets some line

in four distinct points.

9. Let f(x) be a positive-valued function over the reals such that f

(x) > f(x) for all x.

For what k must there exist N such that f(x) > e

kx

for x > N?

10. Let A be the matrix

3 2

4 2

**and for positive integers n, deﬁne d
**

n

as the greatest

common divisor of the entries of A

n

− I, where I = ((10)(01)). Prove that d

n

→ ∞

as n → ∞.

11. Fix n a positive integer. For α real, deﬁne f

α

(i) as the greatest integer less than or

equal to αi, and write f

k

for the k-th iterate of f (i.e. f

1

= f and f

k+1

= f ◦ f

k

).

Prove there exists α such that f

α

k (n

2

) = f

k

α

(n

2

) = n

2

−k for k = 1, . . . , n.

12. Suppose a, b, c, d are integers with 0 ≤ a ≤ bleq99, 0 ≤ c ≤ d ≤ 99. For any integer i,

let n

i

= 101i + 1002

i

. Show that if n

a

+ n

b

is congruent to n

c

+n

d

mod 10100, then

a = c and b = d.

2.11 56

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1995

1. Let S be a set of real numbers which is closed under multiplication (that is, if a and

b are in S, then so is ab). Let T and U be disjoint subsets of S whose union is S.

Given that the product of any three (not necessarily distinct) elements of T is in T

and that the product of any three elements of U is in U, show that at least one of

the two subsets T, U is closed under multiplication.

2. For what pairs (a, b) of positive real numbers does the improper integral

∞

b

√

x +a −

√

x −

√

x −

√

x −b

dx

70 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

converge?

3. The number d

1

d

2

. . . d

9

has nine (not necessarily distinct) decimal digits. The number

e

1

e

2

. . . e

9

is such that each of the nine 9-digit numbers formed by replacing just one

of the digits d

i

is d

1

d

2

. . . d

9

by the corresponding digit e

i

(1 ≤ i ≤ 9) is divisible by 7.

The number f

1

f

2

. . . f

9

is related to e

1

e

2

. . . e

9

is the same way: that is, each of the nine

numbers formed by replacing one of the e

i

by the corresponding f

i

is divisible by 7.

Show that, for each i, d

i

−f

i

is divisible by 7. [For example, if d

1

d

2

. . . d

9

= 199501996,

then e

6

may be 2 or 9, since 199502996 and 199509996 are multiples of 7.]

4. Suppose we have a necklace of n beads. Each bead is labeled with an integer and the

sum of all these labels is n −1. Prove that we can cut the necklace to form a string

whose consecutive labels x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

satisfy

k

¸

i=1

x

i

≤ k −1 for k = 1, 2, . . . , n.

5. Let x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

be diﬀerentiable (real-valued) functions of a single variable f which

satisfy

dx

1

dt

= a

11

x

1

+a

12

x

2

+ +a

1n

x

n

dx

2

dt

= a

21

x

1

+a

22

x

2

+ +a

2n

x

n

.

.

.

.

.

.

dx

n

dt

= a

n1

x

1

+a

n2

x

2

+ +a

nn

x

n

for some constants a

ij

> 0. Suppose that for all i, x

i

(t) → 0 as t → ∞. Are the

functions x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

necessarily linearly dependent?

6. Suppose that each of n people writes down the numbers 1,2,3 in random order in

one column of a 3 n matrix, with all orders equally likely and with the orders for

diﬀerent columns independent of each other. Let the row sums a, b, c of the resulting

matrix be rearranged (if necessary) so that a ≤ b ≤ c. Show that for some n ≥ 1995,

it is at least four times as likely that both b = a +1 and c = a +2 as that a = b = c.

7. For a partition π of ¦1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9¦, let π(x) be the number of elements in the

part containing x. Prove that for any two partitions π and π

**, there are two distinct
**

numbers x and y in ¦1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9¦ such that π(x) = π(y) and π

(x) = π

(y).

[A partition of a set S is a collection of disjoint subsets (parts) whose union is S.]

2.12. 57

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1996 71

8. An ellipse, whose semi-axes have lengths a and b, rolls without slipping on the curve

y = c sin

x

a

**. How are a, b, c related, given that the ellipse completes one revolution
**

when it traverses one period of the curve?

9. To each positive integer with n

2

decimal digits, we associate the determinant of the

matrix obtained by writing the digits in order across the rows. For example, for

n = 2, to the integer 8617 we associate det

8 6

1 7

= 50. Find, as a function of n,

the sum of all the determinants associated with n

2

-digit integers. (Leading digits are

assumed to be nonzero; for example, for n = 2, there are 9000 determinants.)

10. Evaluate

8

2207 −

1

2207 −

1

2207−...

.

Express your answer in the form

a+b

√

c

d

, where a, b, c, d are integers.

11. A game starts with four heaps of beans, containing 3,4,5 and 6 beans. The two players

move alternately. A move consists of taking either

a) one bean from a heap, provided at least two beans are left behind in that heap,

or

b) a complete heap of two or three beans.

The player who takes the last heap wins. To win the game, do you want to move ﬁrst

or second? Give a winning strategy.

12. For a positive real number α, deﬁne

S(α) = ¦nα| : n = 1, 2, 3, . . .¦.

Prove that ¦1, 2, 3, . . .¦ cannot be expressed as the disjoint union of three sets S(α), S(β)

and S(γ). [As usual, x| is the greatest integer ≤ x.]

2.12 57

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1996

1. Find the least number A such that for any two squares of combined area 1, a rectangle

of area A exists such that the two squares can be packed in the rectangle (without

interior overlap). You may assume that the sides of the squares are parallel to the

sides of the rectangle.

72 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

2. Let C

1

and C

2

be circles whose centers are 10 units apart, and whose radii are 1 and

3. Find, with proof, the locus of all points M for which there exists points X on C

1

and Y on C

2

such that M is the midpoint of the line segment XY .

3. Suppose that each of 20 students has made a choice of anywhere from 0 to 6 courses

from a total of 6 courses oﬀered. Prove or disprove: there are 5 students and 2 courses

such that all 5 have chosen both courses or all 5 have chosen neither course.

4. Let S be the set of ordered triples (a, b, c) of distinct elements of a ﬁnite set A.

Suppose that

(a) (a, b, c) ∈ S if and only if (b, c, a) ∈ S;

(b) (a, b, c) ∈ S if and only if (c, b, a) / ∈ S;

(c) (a, b, c) and (c, d, a) are both in S if and only if (b, c, d) and (d, a, b) are both in

S.

Prove that there exists a one-to-one function g from A to R such that g(a) < g(b) <

g(c) implies (a, b, c) ∈ S. Note: R is the set of real numbers.

5. If p is a prime number greater than 3 and k = 2p/3|, prove that the sum

p

1

+

p

2

+ +

p

k

**of binomial coeﬃcients is divisible by p
**

2

.

6. Let c > 0 be a constant. Give a complete description, with proof, of the set of all

continuous functions f : R → R such that f(x) = f(x

2

+c) for all x ∈ R. Note that

R denotes the set of real numbers.

7. Deﬁne a selﬁsh set to be a set which has its own cardinality (number of elements)

as an element. Find, with proof, the number of subsets of ¦1, 2, . . . , n¦ which are

minimal selﬁsh sets, that is, selﬁsh sets none of whose proper subsets is selﬁsh.

8. Show that for every positive integer n,

2n −1

e

2n−1

2

< 1 3 5 (2n −1) <

2n + 1

e

2n+1

2

.

9. Given that ¦x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

¦ = ¦1, 2, . . . , n¦, ﬁnd, with proof, the largest possible value,

as a function of n (with n ≥ 2), of

x

1

x

2

+x

2

x

3

+ +x

n−1

x

n

+x

n

x

1

.

2.13. 58

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1997 73

10. For any square matrix A, we can deﬁne sin A by the usual power series:

sin A =

∞

¸

n=0

(−1)

n

(2n + 1)!

A

2n+1

.

Prove or disprove: there exists a 2 2 matrix A with real entries such that

sin A =

1 1996

0 1

.

11. Given a ﬁnite string S of symbols X and O, we write ∆(S) for the number of X’s in

S minus the number of O’s. For example, ∆(XOOXOOX) = −1. We call a string

S balanced if every substring T of (consecutive symbols of) S has −2 ≤ ∆(T) ≤ 2.

Thus, XOOXOOX is not balanced, since it contains the substring OOXOO. Find,

with proof, the number of balanced strings of length n.

12. Let (a

1

, b

1

), (a

2

, b

2

), . . . , (a

n

, b

n

) be the vertices of a convex polygon which contains

the origin in its interior. Prove that there exist positive real numbers x and y such

that

(a

1

, b

1

)x

a

1

y

b

1

+ (a

2

, b

2

)x

a

2

y

b

2

+ + (a

n

, b

n

)x

an

y

bn

= (0, 0)

2.13 58

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1997

1. A rectangle, HOMF, has sides HO = 11 and OM = 5. A triangle ABC has H

as the intersection of the altitudes, O the center of the circumscribed circle, M the

midpoint of BC, and F the foot of the altitude from A. What is the length of BC?

2. Players 1, 2, 3, . . . , n are seated around a table, and each has a single penny. Player

1 passes a penny to player 2, who then passes two pennies to player 3. Player 3 then

passes one penny to Player 4, who passes two pennies to Player 5, and so on, players

alternately passing one penny or two to the next player who still has some pennies.

A player who runs out of pennies drops out of the game and leaves the table. Find

an inﬁnite set of numbers n for which some player ends up with all n pennies.

3. Evaluate

∞

0

x −

x

3

2

+

x

5

2 4

−

x

7

2 4 6

+

1 +

x

2

2

2

+

x

4

2

2

4

2

+

x

6

2

2

4

2

6

2

+

dx.

74 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

4. Let G be a group with identity e and φ : G → G a function such that

φ(g

1

)φ(g

2

)φ(g

3

) = φ(h

1

)φ(h

2

)φ(h

3

)

whenever g

1

g

2

g

3

= e = h

1

h

2

h

3

. Prove that there exists an element a ∈ G such that

ψ(x) = aφ(x) is a homomorphism (i.e. ψ(xy) = ψ(x)ψ(y) for all x, y ∈ G).

5. Let N

n

denote the number of ordered n-tuples of positive integers (a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

) such

that 1/a

1

+ 1/a

2

+. . . + 1/a

n

= 1. Determine whether N

10

is even or odd.

6. For a positive integer n and any real number c, deﬁne x

k

recursively by x

0

= 0,

x

1

= 1, and for k ≥ 0,

x

k+2

=

cx

k+1

−(n −k)x

k

k + 1

.

Fix n and then take c to be the largest value for which x

n+1

= 0. Find x

k

in terms

of n and k, 1 ≤ k ≤ n.

7. Let ¦x¦ denote the distance between the real number x and the nearest integer. For

each positive integer n, evaluate

F

n

=

6n−1

¸

m=1

min(¦

m

6n

¦, ¦

m

3n

¦).

(Here min(a, b) denotes the minimum of a and b.)

8. Let f be a twice-diﬀerentiable real-valued function satisfying

f(x) +f

(x) = −xg(x)f

(x),

where g(x) ≥ 0 for all real x. Prove that [f(x)[ is bounded.

9. For each positive integer n, write the sum

¸

n

m=1

1/m in the form p

n

/q

n

, where p

n

and

q

n

are relatively prime positive integers. Determine all n such that 5 does not divide

q

n

.

10. Let a

m,n

denote the coeﬃcient of x

n

in the expansion of (1 + x + x

2

)

m

. Prove that

for all [integers] k ≥ 0,

0 ≤

2k

3

¸

i=0

(−1)

i

a

k−i,i

≤ 1.

11. Prove that for n ≥ 2,

n terms

. .. .

2

2

···

2

≡

n −1 terms

. .. .

2

2

···

2

(mod n).

2.14. 59

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1998 75

12. The dissection of the 3–4–5 triangle shown below (into four congruent right triangles

similar to the original) has diameter 5/2. Find the least diameter of a dissection of

this triangle into four parts. (The diameter of a dissection is the least upper bound

of the distances between pairs of points belonging to the same part.)

2.14 59

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1998

1. A right circular cone has base of radius 1 and height 3. A cube is inscribed in the

cone so that one face of the cube is contained in the base of the cone. What is the

side-length of the cube?

2. Let s be any arc of the unit circle lying entirely in the ﬁrst quadrant. Let A be the

area of the region lying below s and above the x-axis and let B be the area of the

region lying to the right of the y-axis and to the left of s. Prove that A+B depends

only on the arc length, and not on the position, of s.

3. Let f be a real function on the real line with continuous third derivative. Prove that

there exists a point a such that

f(a) f

(a) f

(a) f

(a) ≥ 0.

4. Let A

1

= 0 and A

2

= 1. For n > 2, the number A

n

is deﬁned by concatenating the

decimal expansions of A

n−1

and A

n−2

from left to right. For example A

3

= A

2

A

1

= 10,

A

4

= A

3

A

2

= 101, A

5

= A

4

A

3

= 10110, and so forth. Determine all n such that 11

divides A

n

.

5. Let T be a ﬁnite collection of open discs in R

2

whose union contains a set E ⊆ R

2

.

Show that there is a pairwise disjoint subcollection D

1

, . . . , D

n

in T such that

E ⊆ ∪

n

j=1

3D

j

.

Here, if D is the disc of radius r and center P, then 3D is the disc of radius 3r and

center P.

6. Let A, B, C denote distinct points with integer coordinates in R

2

. Prove that if

([AB[ +[BC[)

2

< 8 [ABC] + 1

then A, B, C are three vertices of a square. Here [XY [ is the length of segment XY

and [ABC] is the area of triangle ABC.

76 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

7. Find the minimum value of

(x + 1/x)

6

−(x

6

+ 1/x

6

) −2

(x + 1/x)

3

+ (x

3

+ 1/x

3

)

for x > 0.

8. Given a point (a, b) with 0 < b < a, determine the minimum perimeter of a triangle

with one vertex at (a, b), one on the x-axis, and one on the line y = x. You may

assume that a triangle of minimum perimeter exists.

9. let H be the unit hemisphere ¦(x, y, z) : x

2

+ y

2

+ z

2

= 1, z ≥ 0¦, C the unit circle

¦(x, y, 0) : x

2

+ y

2

= 1¦, and P the regular pentagon inscribed in C. Determine the

surface area of that portion of H lying over the planar region inside P, and write

your answer in the form Asin α +Bcos β, where A, B, α, β are real numbers.

10. Find necessary and suﬃcient conditions on positive integers m and n so that

mn−1

¸

i=0

(−1)

i/m+i/n

= 0.

11. Let N be the positive integer with 1998 decimal digits, all of them 1; that is,

N = 1111 11.

Find the thousandth digit after the decimal point of

√

N.

12. Prove that, for any integers a, b, c, there exists a positive integer n such that

√

n

3

+an

2

+bn +c

is not an integer.

2.15 60

th

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

1999

1. Find polynomials f(x),g(x), and h(x), if they exist, such that for all x,

[f(x)[ −[g(x)[ +h(x) =

−1 if x < −1

3x + 2 if −1 ≤ x ≤ 0

−2x + 2 if x > 0.

2.15. 60

TH

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 1999 77

2. Let p(x) be a polynomial that is nonnegative for all real x. Prove that for some k,

there are polynomials f

1

(x), . . . , f

k

(x) such that

p(x) =

k

¸

j=1

(f

j

(x))

2

.

3. Consider the power series expansion

1

1 −2x −x

2

=

∞

¸

n=0

a

n

x

n

.

Prove that, for each integer n ≥ 0, there is an integer m such that

a

2

n

+a

2

n+1

= a

m

.

4. Sum the series

∞

¸

m=1

∞

¸

n=1

m

2

n

3

m

(n3

m

+m3

n

)

.

5. Prove that there is a constant C such that, if p(x) is a polynomial of degree 1999,

then

[p(0)[ ≤ C

1

−1

[p(x)[ dx.

6. The sequence (a

n

)

n≥1

is deﬁned by a

1

= 1, a

2

= 2, a

3

= 24, and, for n ≥ 4,

a

n

=

6a

2

n−1

a

n−3

−8a

n−1

a

2

n−2

a

n−2

a

n−3

.

Show that, for all n, a

n

is an integer multiple of n.

7. Right triangle ABC has right angle at C and ∠BAC = θ; the point D is chosen on

AB so that [AC[ = [AD[ = 1; the point E is chosen on BC so that ∠CDE = θ. The

perpendicular to BC at E meets AB at F. Evaluate lim

θ→0

[EF[.

8. Let P(x) be a polynomial of degree n such that P(x) = Q(x)P

(x), where Q(x) is a

quadratic polynomial and P

**(x) is the second derivative of P(x). Show that if P(x)
**

has at least two distinct roots then it must have n distinct roots.

9. Let A = ¦(x, y) : 0 ≤ x, y < 1¦. For (x, y) ∈ A, let

S(x, y) =

¸

1

2

≤

m

n

≤2

x

m

y

n

,

78 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

where the sum ranges over all pairs (m, n) of positive integers satisfying the indicated

inequalities. Evaluate

lim

(x,y)→(1,1),(x,y)∈A

(1 −xy

2

)(1 −x

2

y)S(x, y).

10. Let f be a real function with a continuous third derivative such that f(x), f

(x), f

(x), f

(x)

are positive for all x. Suppose that f

(x) ≤ f(x) for all x. Show that f

(x) < 2f(x)

for all x.

11. For an integer n ≥ 3, let θ = 2π/n. Evaluate the determinant of the n n matrix

I +A, where I is the nn identity matrix and A = (a

jk

) has entries a

jk

= cos(jθ+kθ)

for all j, k.

12. Let S be a ﬁnite set of integers, each greater than 1. Suppose that for each integer

n there is some s ∈ S such that gcd(s, n) = 1 or gcd(s, n) = s. Show that there exist

s, t ∈ S such that gcd(s, t) is prime.

2.16. 61

ST

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 2000 79

2.16 61

st

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

2000

1. Let A be a positive real number. What are the possible values of

¸

∞

j=0

x

2

j

, given that

x

0

, x

1

, . . . are positive numbers for which

¸

∞

j=0

x

j

= A?

2. Prove that there exist inﬁnitely many integers n such that n, n+1, n+2 are each the

sum of the squares of two integers. [Example: 0 = 0

2

+ 0

2

, 1 = 0

2

+ 1

2

, 2 = 1

2

+ 1

2

.]

3. The octagon P

1

P

2

P

3

P

4

P

5

P

6

P

7

P

8

is inscribed in a circle, with the vertices around the

circumference in the given order. Given that the polygon P

1

P

3

P

5

P

7

is a square of

area 5, and the polygon P

2

P

4

P

6

P

8

is aectangle of area 4, ﬁnd the maximum possible

area of the octagon.

4. Show that the improper integral

lim

B→∞

B

0

sin(x) sin(x

2

) dx

converges.

5. Three distinct points with integer coordinates lie in the plane on a circle of radius

r > 0. Show that two of these points are separated by a distance of at least r

1/3

.

6. Let f(x) be a polynomial with integer coeﬃcients. Deﬁne a sequence a

0

, a

1

, . . . of

integers such that a

0

= 0 and a

n+1

= f(a

n

) for all n ≥ 0. Prove that if there exists a

positive integer m for which a

m

= 0 then either a

1

= 0 or a

2

= 0.

7. Let a

j

, b

j

, c

j

be integers for 1 ≤ j ≤ N. Assume for each j, at least one of a

j

, b

j

, c

j

is

odd. Show that there exist integers r, s, t such that ra

j

+sb

j

+tc

j

is odd for at least

4N/7 values of j, 1 ≤ j ≤ N.

8. Prove that the expression

gcd(m, n)

n

n

m

**is an integer for all pairs of integers n ≥ m ≥ 1.
**

9. Let f(t) =

¸

N

j=1

a

j

sin(2πjt), where each a

j

is real and a

N

is not equal to 0. Let N

k

denote the number of zeroes (including multiplicities) of

d

k

f

dt

k

. Prove that

N

0

≤ N

1

≤ N

2

≤ and lim

k→∞

N

k

= 2N.

[Editorial clariﬁcation: only zeroes in [0, 1) should be counted.]

80 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

10. Let f(x) be a continuous function such that f(2x

2

−1) = 2xf(x) for all x. Show that

f(x) = 0 for −1 ≤ x ≤ 1.

11. Let S

0

be a ﬁnite set of positive integers. We deﬁne ﬁnite sets S

1

, S

2

, . . . of positive

integers as follows: the integer a is in S

n+1

if and only if exactly one of a −1 or a is

in S

n

. Show that there exist inﬁnitely many integers N for which S

N

= S

0

∪¦N +a :

a ∈ S

0

¦.

12. Let B be a set of more than

2

n+1

n

distinct points with coordinates of the form

(±1, ±1, . . . , ±1) in n-dimensional space with n ≥ 3. Show that there are three

distinct points in B which are the vertices of an equilateral triangle.

2.17 62

nd

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

2001

1. Consider a set S and a binary operation ∗, i.e., for each a, b ∈ S, a ∗ b ∈ S. Assume

(a ∗ b) ∗ a = b for all a, b ∈ S. Prove that a ∗ (b ∗ a) = b for all a, b ∈ S.

2. You have coins C

1

, C

2

, . . . , C

n

. For each k, C

k

is biased so that, when tossed, it has

probability 1/(2k+1) of falling heads. If the n coins are tossed, what is the probability

that the number of heads is odd? Express the answer as a rational function of n.

3. For each integer m, consider the polynomial

P

m

(x) = x

4

−(2m+ 4)x

2

+ (m−2)

2

.

For what values of m is P

m

(x) the product of two non-constant polynomials with

integer coeﬃcients?

4. Triangle ABC has an area 1. Points E, F, G lie, respectively, on sides BC, CA, AB

such that AE bisects BF at point R, BF bisects CG at point S, and CG bisects AE

at point T. Find the area of the triangle RST.

5. Prove that there are unique positive integers a, n such that a

n+1

−(a + 1)

n

= 2001.

6. Can an arc of a parabola inside a circle of radius 1 have a length greater than 4?

7. Let n be an even positive integer. Write the numbers 1, 2, . . . , n

2

in the squares of an

n n grid so that the k-th row, from left to right, is

(k −1)n + 1, (k −1)n + 2, . . . , (k −1)n +n.

2.18. 63

RD

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 2002 81

Color the squares of the grid so that half of the squares in each row and in each column

are red and the other half are black (a checkerboard coloring is one possibility). Prove

that for each coloring, the sum of the numbers on the red squares is equal to the sum

of the numbers on the black squares.

8. Find all pairs of real numbers (x, y) satisfying the system of equations

1

x

+

1

2y

= (x

2

+ 3y

2

)(3x

2

+y

2

)

1

x

−

1

2y

= 2(y

4

−x

4

).

9. For any positive integer n, let 'n` denote the closest integer to

√

n. Evaluate

∞

¸

n=1

2

n

+ 2

−n

2

n

.

10. Let S denote the set of rational numbers diﬀerent from ¦−1, 0, 1¦. Deﬁne f : S → S

by f(x) = x −1/x. Prove or disprove that

∞

¸

n=1

f

(n)

(S) = ∅,

where f

(n)

denotes f composed with itself n times.

11. Let a and b be real numbers in the interval (0, 1/2), and let g be a continuous real-

valued function such that g(g(x)) = ag(x) + bx for all real x. Prove that g(x) = cx

for some constant c.

12. Assume that (a

n

)

n≥1

is an increasing sequence of positive real numbers such that

lima

n

/n = 0. Must there exist inﬁnitely many positive integers n such that a

n−i

+

a

n+i

< 2a

n

for i = 1, 2, . . . , n −1?

2.18 63

rd

Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition,

2002

1. Let k be a ﬁxed positive integer. The n-th derivative of

1

x

k

−1

has the form

Pn(x)

(x

k

−1)

n+1

where P

n

(x) is a polynomial. Find P

n

(1).

2. Given any ﬁve points on a sphere, show that some four of them must lie on a closed

hemisphere.

82 CHAPTER 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION

3. Let n ≥ 2 be an integer and T

n

be the number of non-empty subsets S of ¦1, 2, 3, . . . , n¦

with the property that the average of the elements of S is an integer. Prove that T

n

−n

is always even.

4. In Determinant Tic-Tac-Toe, Player 1 enters a 1 in an empty 3 3 matrix. Player

0 counters with a 0 in a vacant position, and play continues in turn until the 3 3

matrix is completed with ﬁve 1’s and four 0’s. Player 0 wins if the determinant is 0

and player 1 wins otherwise. Assuming both players pursue optimal strategies, who

will win and how?

5. Deﬁne a sequence by a

0

= 1, together with the rules a

2n+1

= a

n

and a

2n+2

= a

n

+a

n+1

for each integer n ≥ 0. Prove that every positive rational number appears in the set

a

n−1

a

n

: n ≥ 1

=

1

1

,

1

2

,

2

1

,

1

3

,

3

2

, . . .

.

6. Fix an integer b ≥ 2. Let f(1) = 1, f(2) = 2, and for each n ≥ 3, deﬁne f(n) = nf(d),

where d is the number of base-b digits of n. For which values of b does

∞

¸

n=1

1

f(n)

converge?

7. Shanille O’Keal shoots free throws on a basketball court. She hits the ﬁrst and misses

the second, and thereafter the probability that she hits the next shot is equal to the

proportion of shots she has hit so far. What is the probability she hits exactly 50 of

her ﬁrst 100 shots?

8. Consider a polyhedron with at least ﬁve faces such that exactly three edges emerge

from each of its vertices. Two players play the following game:

Each player, in turn, signs his or her name on a previously unsigned

face. The winner is the player who ﬁrst succeeds in signing three faces

that share a common vertex.

Show that the player who signs ﬁrst will always win by playing as well as possible.

9. Show that, for all integers n > 1,

1

2ne

<

1

e

−

1 −

1

n

n

<

1

ne

.

2.18. 63

RD

ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION, 2002 83

10. An integer n, unknown to you, has been randomly chosen in the interval [1, 2002]

with uniform probability. Your objective is to select n in an odd number of guesses.

After each incorrect guess, you are informed whether n is higher or lower, and you

must guess an integer on your next turn among the numbers that are still feasibly

correct. Show that you have a strategy so that the chance of winning is greater than

2/3.

11. A palindrome in base b is a positive integer whose base-b digits read the same back-

wards and forwards; for example, 2002 is a 4-digit palindrome in base 10. Note that

200 is not a palindrome in base 10, but it is the 3-digit palindrome 242 in base 9, and

404 in base 7. Prove that there is an integer which is a 3-digit palindrome in base b

for at least 2002 diﬀerent values of b.

12. Let p be a prime number. Prove that the determinant of the matrix

¸

¸

x y z

x

p

y

p

z

p

x

p

2

y

p

2

z

p

2

¸

**is congruent modulo p to a product of polynomials of the formax+by+cz, where a, b, c
**

are integers. (We say two integer polynomials are congruent modulo p if corresponding

coeﬃcients are congruent modulo p.)

Chapter 3

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical

Olympiads

3.1 1

st

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1989

1. Let x

1

, x

2

, . . . , x

n

be positive real numbers, and let

S = x

1

+ x

2

+ +x

n

.

Prove that

(1 +x

1

)(1 +x

2

) (1 +x

n

) ≤ 1 +S +

S

2

2!

+

S

3

3!

+ +

S

n

n!

.

2. Prove that the equation

6(6a

2

+ 3b

2

+c

2

) = 5n

2

has no solutions in integers except a = b = c = n = 0.

3. Let A

1

, A

2

, A

3

be three points in the plane, and for convenience, let A

4

= A

1

,

A

5

= A

2

. For n = 1, 2, and 3, suppose that B

n

is the midpoint of A

n

A

n+1

, and

suppose that C

n

is the midpoint of A

n

B

n

. Suppose that A

n

C

n+1

and B

n

A

n+2

meet

at D

n

, and that A

n

B

n+1

and C

n

A

n+2

meet at E

n

. Calculate the ratio of the area of

triangle ´D

1

D

2

D

3

to the area of triangle ´E

1

E

2

E

3

.

4. Let S be a set consisting of m pairs (a, b) of positive integers with the property that

1 ≤ a < b ≤ n. Show that there are at least

4m

(m−

n

2

4

)

3n

84

3.2. 2

ND

ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD, 1990 85

triples (a, b, c) such that (a, b), (a, c), and (b, c) belong to S.

5. Determine all functions f from the reals to the reals for which

(1) f(x) is strictly increasing,

(2) f(x) +g(x) = 2x for all real x,

where g(x) is the composition inverse function to f(x). (Note: f and g are said to

be composition inverses if f(g(x)) = x and g(f(x)) = x for all real x.)

3.2 2

nd

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1990

1. Given triagnle ABC, let D, E, F be the midpoints of BC, AC, AB respectively and

let G be the centroid of the triangle.

For each value of ∠BAC, how many non-similar triangles are there in which AEGF

is a cyclic quadrilateral?

2. Let a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

be positive real numbers, and let S

k

be the sum of the products of

a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

taken k at a time. Show that

S

k

S

n−k

≥

n

k

2

a

1

a

2

a

n

for k = 1, 2, . . . , n −1.

3. Consider all the triangles ABC which have a ﬁxed base AB and whose altitude from

C is a constant h. For which of these triangles is the product of its altitudes a

maximum?

4. A set of 1990 persons is divided into non-intersecting subsets in such a way that:

(a) No one in a subset knows all the others in the subset,

(b) Among any three persons in a subset, there are always at least two who do not

know each other, and

(c) For any two persons in a subset who do not know each other, there is exactly

one person in the same subset knowing both of them.

a Prove that within each subset, every person has the same number of acquain-

tances.

b Determine the maximum possible number of subsets.

86 CHAPTER 3. ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS

Note: It is understood that if a person A knows person B, then person B will know

person A; an acquaintance is someone who is known. Every person is assumed to

know one’s self.

5. Show that for every integer n ≥ 6, there exists a convex hexagon which can be

dissected into exactly n congruent triangles.

3.3 3

rd

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1991

1. Let G be the centroid of triangle ´ABC and M be the midpoint of BC. Let X be

on AB and Y on AC such that the points X, Y , and G are collinear and XY and

BC are parallel. Suppose that XC and GB intersect at Q and Y B and GC intersect

at P. Show that triangle ´MPQ is similar to triangle ´ABC.

2. Suppose there are 997 points given in a plane. If every two points are joined by a

line segment with its midpoint coloured in red, show that there are at least 1991 red

points in the plane. Can you ﬁnd a special case with exactly 1991 red points?

3. Let a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

, b

1

, b

2

, . . . , b

n

be positive real numbers such that a

1

+a

2

+ +a

n

=

b

1

+b

2

+ +b

n

. Show that

a

2

1

a

1

+b

1

+

a

2

2

a

2

+b

2

+ +

a

2

n

a

n

+b

n

≥

a

1

+a

2

+ +a

n

2

4. During a break, n children at school sit in a circle around their teacher to play a

game. The teacher walks clockwise close to the children and hands out candies to

some of them according to the following rule. He selects one child and gives him a

candy, then he skips the next child and gives a candy to the next one, then he skips 2

and gives a candy to the next one, then he skips 3, and so on. Determine the values

of n for which eventually, perhaps after many rounds, all children will have at least

one candy each.

5. Given are two tangent circles and a point P on their common tangent perpendicular

to the lines joining their centres. Construct with ruler and compass all the circles

that are tangent to these two circles and pass through the point P.

3.4 4

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1992

1. A triangle with sides a, b, and c is given. Denote by s the semiperimeter, that is

3.5. 5

TH

ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD, 1993 87

s =

a+b+c

2

. Construct a triangle with sides s − a, s − b, and s − c. This process is

repeated until a triangle can no longer be constructed with the side lengths given.

For which original triangles can this process be repeated indeﬁnitely?

2. In a circle C with centre O and radius r, let C

1

, C

2

be two circles with centres O

1

,

O

2

and radii r

1

, r

2

respectively, so that each circle C

i

is internally tangent to C at

A

i

and so that C

1

, C

2

are externally tangent to each other at A.Prove that the three

lines OA, O

1

A

2

, and O

2

A

1

are concurrent.

3. Let n be an integer such that n > 3. Suppose that we choose three numbers from the

set ¦1, 2, . . . , n¦. Using each of these three numbers only once and using addition,

multiplication, and parenthesis, let us form all possible combinations.

(a) Show that if we choose all three numbers greater than n/2, then thealues of

these combinations are all distinct.

(b) Let p be a prime number such that p ≤

√

n. Show that the number of ways

of choosing three numbers so that the smallest one is p and the values of the

combinations are not all distinct is precisely the number of positive divisors of

p −1.

4. Determine all pairs (h, s) of positive integers with the following property: If one draws

h horizontal lines and another s lines which satisfy:

i they are not horizontal,

ii no two of them are parallel,

iii no three of the h +s lines are concurrent,

then the number of regions formed by these h +s lines is 1992.

5. Find a sequence of maximal length consisting of non-zero integers in which the sum

of any seven consecutive terms is positive and that of any eleven consecutive terms

is negative.

3.5 5

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1993

1. Let ABCD be a quadrilateral such that all sides have equal length and angle ABC is

60 deg. Let l be a line passing through D and not intersecting the quadrilateral (except

at D). Let E and F be the points of intersection of l with AB and BC respectively.

Let M be the point of intersection of CE and AF. Prove that CA

2

= CM CE.

88 CHAPTER 3. ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS

2. Find the total number of diﬀerent integer values the function

f(x) = [x] + [2x] + [

5x

3

] + [3x] + [4x]

takes for real numbers x with 0 ≤ x ≤ 100.

3. Let

f(x) = a

n

x

n

+a

n−1

x

n−1

+ +a

0

and

g(x) = c

n+1

x

n+1

+c

n

x

n

+ +c

0

be non-zero polynomials with real coeﬃcients such that g(x) = (x +r)f(x) for some

real number r. If a = max([a

n

[, . . . , [a

0

[) and c = max([c

n+1

[, . . . , [c

0

[), prove that

a

c

≤ n + 1.

4. Determine all positive integers n for which the equation

x

n

+ (2 +x)

n

+ (2 −x)

n

= 0

has an integer as a solution.

5. Let P

1

, P

2

, . . . , P

1993

= P

0

be distinct points in the xy-plane with the following

properties:

i both coordinates of P

i

are integers, for i = 1, 2, . . . , 1993;

ii there is no point other than P

i

and P

i+1

on the line segment joining P

i

with P

i+1

whose coordinates are both integers, for i = 0, 1, . . . , 1992.

Prove that for some i, 0 ≤ i ≤ 1992, there exists a point Q with coordinates (q

x

, q

y

)

on the line segment joining P

i

with P

i+1

such that both 2q

x

and 2q

y

are odd integers.

3.6 6

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1994

1. Let f : R →R be a function such that:

i For all x, y ∈ R,

f(x) +f(y) + 1 ≥ f(x +y) ≥ f(x) +f(y)

ii For all x ∈ [0, 1), f(0) ≥ f(x),

iii −f(−1) = f(1) = 1.

3.7. 7

TH

ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD, 1995 89

Find all such functions f.

2. Given a nondegenerate triangle ´ABC, with circumcentre O, orthocentre H, and

circumradius R, prove that [OH[ < 3R.

3. Let n be an integer of the form a

2

+ b

2

, where a and b are relatively prime integers

and such that if p is a prime, p ≤

√

n, then p divides ab. Determine all such n.

4. Is there an inﬁnite set of points in the plane such that no three points are collinear,

and the distance between any two points is rational?

5. You are given three lists A, B, and C. List A contains the numbers of the form 10

k

in base 10, with k any integer greater than or equal to 1. Lists B and C contain the

same numbers translated into base 2 and 5 respectively:

A B C

10 1010 20

100 1100100 400

1000 1111101000 13000

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Prove that for every integer n > 1, there is exactly one number in exactly one of the

lists B or C that has exactly n digits.

3.7 7

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1995

1. Determine all sequences of real numbers a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

1995

which satisfy:

2

a

n

−(n −1) ≥ a

n+1

−(n −1), for n = 1, 2, . . . 1994,

and

2

√

a

1995

−1994 ≥ a

1

+ 1.

2. Let a

1

, a

2

, . . . , a

n

be a sequence of integers with values between 2 and 1995 such

that:

i Any two of the a

i

’s are realtively prime,

ii Each a

i

is either a prime or a product of primes.

Determine the smallest possible values of n to make sure that the sequence will contain

a prime number.

90 CHAPTER 3. ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS

3. Let PQRS be a cyclic quadrilateral such that the segments PQ and RS are not

parallel. Consider the set of circles through P and Q, and the set of circles through

R and S. Determine the set A of points of tangency of circles in these two sets.

4. Let C be a circle with radius R and centre O, and S a ﬁxed point in the interior of

C. Let AA

and BB

**be perpendicular chords through S. Consider the rectangles
**

SAMB, SBN

A

, SA

M

B

, and SB

NA. Find the set of all points M, N

, M

, and

N when A moves around the whole circle.

5. Find the minimum positive integer k such that there exists a function f from the

set Z of all integers to ¦1, 2, . . . k¦ with the property that f(x) = f(y) whenever

[x −y[ ∈ ¦5, 7, 12¦.

3.8 8

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1996

1. Let ABCD be a quadrilateral AB = BC = CD = DA. Let MN and PQ be

two segments perpendicular to the diagonal BD and such that the distance between

them is d > BD/2, with M ∈ AD, N ∈ DC, P ∈ AB, and Q ∈ BC. Show that the

perimeter of hexagon AMNCQP does not depend on the position of MN and PQ

so long as the distance between them remains constant.

2. Let m and n be positive integers such that n ≤ m. Prove that

2

n

n! ≤

(m+n)!

(m−n)!

≤ (m

2

+m)

n

3. Let P

1

, P

2

, P

3

, P

4

be four points on a circle, and let I

1

be the incentre of the triangle

P

2

P

3

P

4

; I

2

be the incentre of the triangle P

1

P

3

P

4

; I

3

be the incentre of the triangle

P

1

P

2

P

4

; I

4

be the incentre of the triangle P

1

P

2

P

3

. Prove that I

1

, I

2

, I

3

, I

4

are the

vertices of a rectangle.

4. The National Marriage Council wishes to invite n couples to form 17 discussion groups

under the following conditions:

(a) All members of a group must be of the same sex; i.e. they are either all male or

all female.

(b) The diﬀerence in the size of any two groups is 0 or 1.

(c) All groups have at least 1 member.

(d) Each person must belong to one and only one group.

3.9. 9

TH

ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD, 1997 91

Find all values of n, n ≤ 1996, for which this is possible. Justify your answer.

5. Let a, b, c be the lengths of the sides of a triangle. Prove that

√

a +b −c +

√

b +c −a +

√

c +a −b ≤

√

a +

√

b +

√

c ,

and determine when equality occurs.

3.9 9

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1997

1. Given

S = 1 +

1

1 +

1

3

+

1

1 +

1

3

+

1

6

+ +

1

1 +

1

3

+

1

6

+ +

1

1993006

where the denominators contain partial sums of the sequence of reciprocals of trian-

gular numbers (i.e. k = n(n + 1)/2 for n = 1, 2, . . . , 1996). Prove that S > 1001.

2. Find an integer n, where 100 ≤ n ≤ 1997, such that

2

n

+ 2

n

is also an integer.

3. Let ´ABC be a triangle inscribed in a circle and let

l

a

=

m

a

M

a

, l

b

=

m

b

M

b

, l

c

=

m

c

M

c

,

where m

a

, m

b

, m

c

are the lengths of the angle bisectors (internal to the triangle) and

M

a

, M

b

, M

c

are the lengths of the angle bisectors extended until they meet the circle.

Prove that

l

a

sin

2

A

+

l

b

sin

2

B

+

l

c

sin

2

C

≥ 3,

and that equality holds iﬀ ABC is an equilateral triangle.

4. Triangle ´A

1

A

2

A

3

has a right angle at A

3

. A sequence of points is now deﬁned by

the following iterative process, where n is a positive integer. From A

n

(n ≥ 3), a

perpendicular line is drawn to meet A

n−2

A

n−1

at A

n+1

.

(a) Prove that if this process is continued indeﬁnitely, then one and only one point

P is interior to every triangle A

n−2

A

n−1

A

n

, n ≥ 3.

92 CHAPTER 3. ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS

(b) Let A

1

and A

3

be ﬁxed points. By considering all possible locations of A

2

on

the plane, ﬁnd the locus of P.

5. Suppose that n people A

1

, A

2

, . . ., A

n

, (n ≥ 3) are seated in a circle and that A

i

has

a

i

objects such that

a

1

+a

2

+ +a

n

= nN,

where N is a positive integer. In order that each person has the same number of

objects, each person A

i

is to give or to receive a certain number of objects to or from

its two neighbours A

i−1

and A

i+1

. (Here A

n+1

means A

1

and A

n

means A

0

.) How

should this redistribution be performed so that the total number of objects transferred

is minimum?

3.10 10

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1998

1. Let F be the set of all n−tuples (A

1

, . . . , A

n

) such that each A

i

is a subset of

¦1, 2, . . . , 1998¦. Let [A[ denote the number of elements of the set A. Find:

¸

(A

1

,...,An)∈F

[A

1

∪ ∪ A

n

[

2. Show that for any positive integers a and b, (36a +b)(a +36b) can not be a power of

2.

3. Let a, b, c be positive real numbers. Pruve that:

1 +

a

b

1 +

b

c

1 +

c

a

≥ 2

1 +

a +b +c

3

√

abc

**4. Let ´ABC be a triangle and D the foot of the altitude from A. Let E and F lie on
**

a line through D such that AE is perpendicular to BC, AF is perpendicular to CF,

and E and F are diﬀerent from D. Let M and N be the midpoint of the segments

BC and EF, respectively. Prove that AN is perpendicular to NM.

5. Find the largest integer n such that n is divisible by all positive integers less than

3

√

n.

3.11. 11

TH

ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD, 1999 93

3.11 11

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 1999

1. Find the smallest positive integer n with the following property: there does not exist

an arithmetic progression of 1999 real numbers containing exactly n integers.

2. Let a

1

, a

2

, . . . be a sequence of real numbers satisfying a

i+j

≤ a

i

+ a

j

for all i, j =

1, 2, . . .. Prove that

a

1

+

a

2

2

+

a

3

3

+ +

a

n

n

≥ a

n

for each positive integer n.

3. Let Γ

1

and Γ

2

be two circles intersecting at P and Q. The common tangent, closer

to P, of Γ

1

and Γ

2

touches Γ

1

at A and Γ

2

at B. The tangent of Γ

1

at P meets Γ

2

at

C, which is diﬀerent from P, and the extension of AP meets BC at R. Prove that

the circumcircle of triangle PQR is tangent to BP and BR.

4. Determine all pairs (a, b) of integers with the property that the numbers a

2

+4b and

b

2

+ 4a are both perfect squares.

5. Let S be a set of 2n + 1 points in the plane such that no three are collinear and no

four concyclic. A circle will be called good if it has 3 points of S on its circumference,

n −1 points in its interior and n −1 points in its exterior. Prove that the number of

good circles has the same parity as n.

3.12 12

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2000

1. Compute the sum

S =

101

¸

i=0

x

3

i

1 −3x

i

+ 3x

2

i

for

x

i

=

i

101

2. Given the following triangular arrangement of circles:

94 CHAPTER 3. ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS

**Each of the numbers 1, . . . , 9 is to be written into one of these circles, so that each
**

circle contain exactly one of these numbers and:

i the sum of the four numbers on each side of the triangle are equal;

ii the sum of the squares of the four numbers on each side of the triangle are equal.

Find all ways in which this can be done.

3. Let ´ABC be a triangle. Let M and N be the points in which the median and the

angle bisector, respectively, at A meet the side BC. Let Q and P be the point in

which the perpendicular at N to NA meets MA and BA, respectively, and O the

point in which the perpendicular at P to BA meets AN produced. Prove that QO

is perpendicular to BC.

4. Let n, k be given positive integers with n > k. Prove that

1

n + 1

n

n

k

k

(n −k)

n−k

<

n!

k! (n −k)!

<

n

n

k

k

(n −k)

n−k

5. Given a permutation (a

0

, a

1

, . . . , a

n

) of the sequence 0, 1, . . . , n. A transposition of

a

i

with a

j

is called legal if a

i

= 0 for i > 0, and a

i−1

+ 1 = a

j

. The permu-

tation (a

0

, . . . , a

n

) is called regular if after a number of transpositions it becomes

(1, 2, . . . , n, 0). For which numbers n is the permutation (1, n, n − 1, . . . , 3, 2, 0) reg-

ular?

3.13 13

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2001

1. For a positive integer n let S(n) be the sum of digits in the decimal representation of

n. Any positive integer obtained by removing several (at least one) digits from the

3.14. 14

TH

ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD, 2002 95

right-hand end of the decimal representation of n is called a stump of n. Let T(n)

be the sum of all stumps of n. Prove that n = S(n) + 9T(n).

2. Find the largest positive integer N so that the number of integers in the set ¦1, 2, . . . , N¦

which are divisible by 3 is equal to the number of integers which are divisible by 5 or

7 (or both).

3. Let two equal regular n-gons S and T be located in the plane such that their inter-

section is a 2n-gon (n ≥ 3). The sides of the polygon S are coloured in red and the

sides of T in blue. Prove that the sum of the lengths of the blue sides of the polygon

S ∩ T is equal to the sum of the lengths of its red sides.

4. A point in the plane with a cartesian coordinate system is called a mixed point if one

of its coordinates is rational and the other one is irrational. Find all polynomials

with real coeﬃcients such that their graphs do not contain any mixed point.

5. Find the greatest integer n, such that there are n+4 points A, B, C, D, X

1

, . . . , X

n

in

the plane with AB = CD that satisfy the following condition: for each i = 1, 2, . . . , n

triangles ABX

i

and CDX

i

are equal.

3.14 14

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2002

1. Let a

1

, a

2

, a

3

, . . . , a

n

be a sequence of non-negative integers, where n is a positive

integer. Let

A

n

=

a

1

+ a

2

+ +a

n

n

.

Prove that

a

1

!a

2

! . . . a

n

! ≥ (A

n

|!)

n

,

where A

n

| is the greatest integer less than or equal to A

n

, and a! = 1 2 a

for a ≥ 1 (and 0! = 1). When does equality hold?

2. Find all positive integers a and b such that

a

2

+b

b

2

−a

and

b

2

+a

a

2

−b

are both integers.

3. Let ´ABC be an equilateral triangle. Let P be a point on the side AC and Q be a

point on the side AB so that both triangles ´ABP and ´ACQ are acute. Let R be

96 CHAPTER 3. ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS

the orthocentre of triangle ABP and S be the orthocentre of triangle ACQ. Let T be

the point common to the segments BP and CQ. Find all possible values of CBP

and BCQ such that triangle ´TRS is equilateral.

4. Let x, y, z be positive numbers such that

1

x

+

1

y

+

1

z

= 1.

Show that

√

x +yz +

√

y +zx +

√

z +xy ≥

√

xyz +

√

x +

√

y +

√

z.

5. Let R denote the set of all real numbers. Find all functions f from R to R satisfying:

(i) there are only ﬁnitely many s in R such that f(s) = 0, and

(ii) f(x

4

+y) = x

3

f(x) +f(f(y)) for all x, y in R.

3.15 15

th

Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2003

1. Let a, b, c, d, e, f be real numbers such that the polynomial

p(x) = x

8

−4x

7

+ 7x

6

+ax

5

+bx

4

+cx

3

+dx

2

+ex +f

factorises into eight linear factors x − x

i

, with x

i

> 0 for i = 1, 2, . . . , 8. Determine

all possible values of f.

2. Suppose ABCD is a square piece of cardboard with side length a. On a plane are

two parallel lines

1

and

2

, which are also a units apart. The square ABCD is placed

on the plane so that sides AB and AD intersect

1

at E and F respectively. Also,

sides CB and CD intersect

2

at G and H respectively. Let the perimeters of ´AEF

and ´CGH be m

1

and m

2

respectively. Prove that no matter how the square was

placed, m

1

+m

2

remains constant.

3. Let k ≥ 14 be an integer, and let p

k

be the largest prime number which is strictly

less than k. You may assume that p

k

≥ 3k/4. Let n be a composite integer. Prove:

(a) if n = 2p

k

, then n does not divide (n −k)! ;

(b) if n > 2p

k

, then n divides (n −k)!

4. Let a, b, c be the sides of a triangle, with a +b + c = 1, and let n ≥ 2 be an integer.

Show that

n

√

a

n

+b

n

+

n

√

b

n

+c

n

+

n

√

c

n

+a

n

< 1 +

n

√

2

2

.

3.15. 15

TH

ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD, 2003 97

5. Given two positive integers m and n, ﬁnd the smallest positive integer k such that

among any k people, either there are 2m of them who form m pairs of mutually

acquainted people or there are 2n of them forming n pairs of mutually unacquainted

people.

2

CONTENTS 1.14 14th IMO, USSR, 1972 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15 15th IMO, USSR, 1973 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16 16th IMO, West Germany, 1974 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17 17th IMO, Bulgaria, 1975 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18 18th IMO, Austria, 1976 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 19th IMO, Yugoslavia, 1977 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 20th IMO, Romania, 1978 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 21st IMO, United Kingdom, 1979 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22 22nd IMO, Washington, USA, 1981 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 23rd IMO, Budapest, Hungary, 1982 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 24th IMO, Paris, France, 1983 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 25th IMO, Prague, Czechoslovakia, 1984 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 26th IMO, Helsinki, Finland, 1985 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 27th IMO, Warsaw, Poland, 1986 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28 28th IMO, Havana, Cuba , 1987 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29 29th IMO, Camberra, Australia, 1988 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.30 30th IMO, Braunschweig, West Germany, 1989 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 31st IMO, Beijing, People’s Republic of China, 1990 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32 32nd IMO, Sigtuna, Sweden, 1991 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33 33rd IMO, Moscow, Russia, 1992 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 37 38

CONTENTS 1.34 34th IMO, Istambul, Turkey, 1993 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 35th IMO, Hong Kong, 1994 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.36 36th IMO, Toronto, Canada, 1995 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37 37th IMO, Mumbai, India, 1996 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.38 38th IMO, Mar del Plata, Argentina, 1997 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.39 39th IMO, Taipei, Taiwan, 1998 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.40 40th IMO, Bucharest, Romania, 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.41 41st IMO, Taejon, South Korea, 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.42 42nd IMO, Washington DC, USA, 2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.43 43rd IMO, Glascow, United Kingdom, 2002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.44 44th IMO, Tokyo, Japan, 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

2 William Lowell Putnam Competition 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 46th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1985 . . . . . . . . . . . 47th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1986 . . . . . . . . . . . 48th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1987 . . . . . . . . . . . 49th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1988 . . . . . . . . . . . 50th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1989 . . . . . . . . . . . 51th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1990 . . . . . . . . . . . 52th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1991 . . . . . . . . . . . 53th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition, 1992 . . . . . . . . . . .

50 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64

. . . . 7th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . . . 1989 .6 3. . . . 3 Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiads 3. . . . .8 3. . . 1996 . . . 1993 .18 63rd Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . 1994 . . 3rd Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . . . 2001 . . .17 62nd Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. . . 1995 . . 1999 . . . . . . .3 3. . 2.15 60th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. . . . . . 2. . . . 2. . . . . . . .10 55th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. . 1996 . . . . . . . . . . . .14 59th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. 6th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . . . . . 1991 . . 2. . . . . . . 1992 . . . . . 8th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . . 1997 . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3. . . . .4 2. . . . . . 2. 2002 . 66 68 69 71 73 75 76 79 80 81 2. . . 1994 . . . . . . . 1997 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 . .4 3. . 1998 .1 3. . . . 9th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . .9 1st Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . . . .16 61st Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. . . . . 1993 . . . . . . . . .5 3.11 56th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. . . . . 2. . . . .12 57th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. . . . . . . . . 1995 . . 2nd Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 84 85 86 86 87 88 89 90 91 . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 58th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. . 1990 . . 4th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . . . . . . . . 5th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . .7 3. . .9 CONTENTS 54th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition.

. .CONTENTS 3. . . . . . . . . 2003 . . 2002 . . . . . . 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 11th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. 3. . . 3. . . . . . . 1999 . 3. . . . . . . . . .10 10th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad.14 14th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . .15 15th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . 3. . 1998 .12 12th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . . . . . . . 2001 . . . 5 92 93 93 94 95 96 . . . . . . . . . . . 3. .13 13th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad.

For what real values of x is x+ √ 2x − 1 + x− √ 2x − 1 = A √ given (a) A = 2. c be real numbers.Chapter 1 International Mathematics Olympiad 1. b = 2 and c = −1 4. whose roots are the same as those of the original ecuation. Consider the quadratic equation in cos x: a cos 2 x + b cos x + c = 0. form a quadratic ecuation in cos 2x. Prove that the fraction 2.1 1st IMO. The squares AM CD and M BEF are constructed on the same side of AB. Using the numbers a. b. 6 . An arbitrary point M is selected in the interior of the segment AB. (b) A = 1. Let a. The circles circumscribed abut these squares. Construct a right triangle with hypotenuse c such that the median drawn to the hypotenuse is the geometric mean of the two legs of the triangle. Compare the ecuations in cos x and cos 2x for a = 4. 1959 21n + 4 14n + 3 is irreductible for every natural number n 1. Romania. 5. sith the segments AM and M B as their respective bases. (c) A = 2. b and c. where only non-negative real numbers are admitted for square roots? 3.

1960 7 with centers P and Q intersect at M and also at another point N . Let h be the lenght of the altitude to the hypotenuse of the triangle. 1960 1. Let α be the acute angle subtending. Prove: tan α = (n2 4nh − 1) a 4. Romania. neither of these points lies on the straight line p. (c) Find the locus of the midpoints of the the segment P Q as M varies between A and B. is dividen into n equal parts (n an odd integer). hb (the altitudes fron A and B) and ma . The point A is given in the plane P . (b) Prove that the straight lines M N pass throught a ﬁxed point S independent of the choice of M . In a given right triangle ABC. and the point C in the plane Q. N and 11 is equal to the sum of the squares of the digits of N .1. Two planes. Construct an isosceles trapezoid ABCD (with AB parallel to CD) in which a circle can be inscribed. Construct a triangle ABC. Determine all three-digit numbers N having the property that N is divisible by 11. For what values of the variable x does the following inequality hold? 4x2 √ 1 − 1 + 2x 2 < 2x + 9 3.2 2nd IMO. (a) Prove that the points N and N coinside. the median from vertex A. 5. (a) Find the locus of the midpoints of segment XY . and with vertices B and D lying in the planes P and Q respectively. that segment which contains the middle point of the hypotenuse. where X is any point of AC and Y is any point of B D . ROMANIA. given ha . Consider the cube ABCDA B C D (whith face ABCD directly above face A B C D ). 6. intersect along the line p. P and Q. 2. 2N D IMO. of lenght a.2. . 1. Let N denote the intersection of the straight lines AF and BC. from A. the hypotenuse BC.

In what case does the equality hold? 3. . z (the solutions of the system) are distinct positive numbers. (b) Find the smallest number k for which V1 = kV2 . Let V1 be the volume of the cone and V2 the volumen of the cilinder. (a) Prove that V1 = V2 . P P3 intersect the opposite side in points Q1 . and altitude h is given. (c) Determine under what conditions such points P actually exist. Q2 . Lines P P1 . b. of the P P P numbers P 1 P1 . Prove: a2 + b2 + c2 ≥ 4 3T . ﬁnd all points P such that both legs of the trapezoid subtended right angles at P . INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD (b) Find the locus of points Z which lie on the segment XY of part (a) with ZY = 2XZ. Solve the system of equations: x+y+z = a x + y 2 + z 2 = b2 xy = z 2 2 where a and b are constants. c the sides of a triangle. Consider the triangle P1 P2 P3 and a point P within the triangle. y. A cylinder is circumscribed about this sphere so that one of its bases lies in the base of the cone. Q3 respectively. (Discuss varius case that might arise) 1. (a) On the axis of symmetry of this trapezoid. construct the angle subtended by a diameter of the base of the cone at the vertex of the cone. (b) Calculate the distance of P from either base. √ 2. Give the conditions that a and b must satisfy so that x. 4. 6. Solve the equation cosn x − sinn x = 1. 7. P P2 . P 3 P3 at least one is less than or equal to 2 and at least one is Q Q Q grater than or equal to 2. An isosceles trapezoid with bases a and c. Considere a cone of revolution with an inscribed sphere tangent to the base of the cone. where n is a natural number.8 CHAPTER 1. and T its area. P 2 P2 . for this case.3 3rd IMO. Hungary. Let a. 1961 1. Prove that.

B . BB . Determine and draw the locus of the midpoints of the segment XY . N do not form a triangle) What is the locus of point G as A . N be the midpoints of segments AA . CZECHOSLOVAKIA. Let L. Find the smallest natural number n which has the following properties: (a) Its decimal representation has 6 as the last digit. respectively. Consider the cube ABCDA B C D (ABCD and A B C D are the upper and lower bases. (b) If the last digit 6 is erased and placed in front of the remaining digits. let G the centroid of triangle LM N (We will not considere positions of A . Determine all real number x which satisfy the inequality: √ √ 1 3−x− x+1> 2 3. B . respectively. In what case does the equality hold? 2 6. suppose the plane determined by these three points is not parallel to ε. 4. C on the same side of ε. and edges AA . Prove that a solution exists and only if b tan ω ≥ c < b. CC .4. BB . CC .4 4th IMO. B . DD are parallel) The point X moves at constant speed along the perimeterof the square ABCD in the direction ABCDA. On the circle K there are given three distinct points A. Considere a plane ε and three non-collinear points A. where M is the midpoint of the segment BC and ω < 90◦ . AB = c and AM B = ω. B. the resulting number is four times as large as the original number n 2. . 1962 1. M. Solve the ecuation cos2 x + cos2 2x + cos2 3x = 1 5. Construct (using only straightedge and compasses) a fourth point D on K such that a circle can be inscribed in the cuadrilateral thus obtained. Construct triangle ABC if AC = b. M . Czechoslovakia.1. B. C. Points X and Y begin their motion at the same instant from the starting position A and B . C . C range independently over the plane ε? 1. 4T H IMO. C such that the points L. 1962 9 5. and the point Y moves at the same rate along the perimeter of the square B C CB in the direction B C CBB . In plane a take three arbitrary points A .

3. 4. x3 . D. This prediction was very poor. Five students. 1. Prove that a1 = a2 = · = an . C. AB or their extentions. A. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 6. 1963 √ √ 2 x − p + 2 x2 − 1 = x.10 CHAPTER 1. x5 of the system (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) where y is a parameter 5. The tetrahedon SABC has the following propoerty: there exists ﬁve spheres. BC.5 5th IMO. Considere an isosceles triangle. and the other side intersecting the segment BC. Determine the locus of points in space which are vertices of right angles with one side passing throught A. CA. where p is a real param- 1. each tangent to the edges SA. SC. Prove that the distance d between the centers of these two circles is d = r (r − 2ρ) 7. A second prediction has the contestants ﬁnishing . Find all real roots of the equation eter. Poland. 2. (a) Prove that the tetrahedron SABC is regular. Point A and segment BC are given. SB. (b) Prove conversely that for every regular tetrahedron ﬁve such spheres exist. Find all solution x1 . One prediction was that contestants would ﬁnish in the order ABCDE. In fact no contestant ﬁnished in the position predicted. In an n−gon all of whose interior angles are equal. E. x4 . and no two contestants predicted to ﬁnish consecutively actually did so. took part in a contest. x2 . Prove that cos 2π 3π 1 π − cos + cos = 7 7 7 2 x 5 + x2 x 1 + x3 x 2 + x4 x 3 + x5 x 4 + x1 = = = = = yx1 yx2 yx3 yx4 yx5 6. the lenght of consecutive sides satisfy the relation a1 ≥ a2 ≥ · ≥ an . B. let r be the radius of its circumscribed circle and ρ the radius of its inscribed circle.

B and C. B1 and C1 . Prove that there are at least three people who write to each other about the same topic. CAD and ABD in points A1 . This prediction was better. Is the result true if point D0 is selected anywhere within ABC? 1. Find the sum of the areas of all four inscribed circles (in terms of a. 5. a circle is inscribed.6 6th IMO. USSR. respectively. Each pair of correspondent deals with only one of these topics. Tangents to the circle parallel to the sides of the triangle are constructed. 6. West Germany. each one with all the rest. vertex D is connected with D0 the centroid of ABC. These lines intersect the planes BCD.1. USSR. b. 1964 11 in the order DAECB. Determine all value x in the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 2π which satisfy the inequality √ √ √ 2 cos x ≤ 1 + sin 2x − 1 − sin 2x ≤ 2 . Exactly two of the contestants ﬁnished in the places predicted. A circle is inscribed in triangle ABC with sides a. Let a. (a) Find all positive integers n for which 2n − 1 is divisible by 7. Each of these tangents cuts oﬀ a triangle from ABC. Prove that the volume of ABCD is one third the volume of A1 B1 C1 D0 . 2. Determine the order in which the contestants ﬁnished. Suppose ﬁve points in a plane are situated so that no two of the straight lines joining the other four points. Seventeen people correspond by mail with one another.6. c be the sides of a triangle. c) 4. 1964 (b) Prove that there is not positive integer n such that 2n + 1 is dibisible by 7. b. In tetrahedron ABCD. and two disjoint pairs of students predicted to ﬁnish consecutively actually did so. In their letters only three diﬀerent topics are discussed. 1965 1. Determine the maximum number of intersections that these perpendiculars can have. b. 1. Lines parallel to DD0 are drawn through A. 6T H IMO. Prove that a2 (b + c − a) + b2 (c + a − b) + c2 (a + b − c) ≤ 3abc 3. c. 1. In each of these triangle.7 7th IMO.

3. Among the participants there were 25 students who solved at least one problem each. 5. Of all the . In a plane a set of n points (n ≥ 3) is given. Each pair of points is connected by a segment. parallel to lines AB and CD. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 2. Tetrahedron ABCD is divided into two solid by plane ε. x2 . B. The ratio of the distances of ε from AB and CD is equal to k. Prove that the number of diameters of the given set is at most n. Consider the system of equations a11 x1 + a12 x2 + a13 x3 = 0 a21 x1 + a22 x2 + a23 x3 = 0 a31 x1 + a32 x2 + a33 x3 = 0 with unknowns x1 . The distance between the skew lines AB and CD is d. 1. (c) in each equation. three problems. (b) the remaining coeﬃcients are negative numbers. C were posed. We deﬁne a diameter of the set to be any connecting segment of length d. The point of intersection of the altitudes of OP Q is H. Find all sets of four real numbers x1 .8 8th IMO. x2 . Compute the ratio of the volumes of the two solids obtained. Through a point M = O perpendiculars are dawn to OA and OB. x3 . The coeﬃcient satisfy the conditions: (a) a11 . Consider OAB with acute angle AOB. 1966 1. Bulgaria. x3 . In a mathematical contest. 4. a33 are positive numbers. What is the locus of H if M is permitted to range over (a) the side AB? (b) the interior of OAB? 6. Prove that the given system has only the solution x1 = x2 = x3 = 0. A. Let d be the length of the longest of these segment. Given the tetrahedron ABCD whose edges AB and CD have lenght a and b respectively.12 CHAPTER 1. the feet of which are P and Q respectively. x4 such that the sum of any one and the product of the other three is equal to 2. the sum of the coeﬃcient is positive . and the angle between them is ω. a22 .

respectively. Prove tat if a + b = tan γ (a tan α + b tan β). AB of triangle ABC. M .9. and with BAD = radius 1 with centers A. the number who solved B was twice the number who solved C. b. any points K. D α. In the interior of sides BC. YUGOSLAVIA. a4 are four diﬀerent real numbers. are selected. Solve the system of equations |a1 − a2 |x2 + |a1 − a3 |x3 + |a1 − a4 |x4 |a2 − a1 |x2 + |a2 − a3 |x3 + |a2 − a4 |x4 |a3 − a1 |x1 + |a3 − a2 |x2 + |a3 − a4 |x4 |a4 − a1 |x1 + |a4 − a2 |x2 + |a4 − a3 |x3 where a1 . c be the lengths of the sides of a triangle and α. 4. 6. Let a.9 9th IMO. B. the angles opposite these sides. C. γ. 2. If ABD is acute. respectively. a2 . 9T H IMO. The number of students who solved only problem A was one more than the number of students who solved A and at least one other problem. prove that the four circles of√ cover the parallelogram if and only if a ≤ cos α + 3 sin α. Prove: The sum of the distances of the vertices of a regular tetrahedron from the centre of its circumscribed sphere is less than the sum of the distances of these vertices from any other poin in space. Yugoslavia. L. How many students solved only problem B? 2. is less than or equal to one quarter of the area of ABC CLK = = = = 1 1 1 1 kπ 2t (t any 1. then its volume 1 is smaller than or equal to 8 . 3. β. 1 1 1 + +···+ = cot x − cot 2n x sin 2x sin 4x sin 2n x 5. 1967 1. BKM . AD = 1. Prove that for every natural number n.1. 1967 13 contestants who did not solve problem A. a3 . Prove that if one and only one edge of a tetrahedron is greater than 1. the triangle 2 is isosceles. Prove that the area of at least one of the triangle AM L. CA. and for every real number x = non-negative integer and k any integer). Let ABCD be a parallelogram with side lengths AB = a.

a2 . two medals and 7 of the now remaining medals were awarded. 6. n be natural numbers such that m + k + 1 is a prime greater than n + 1. and construct it. Let A0 B0 C0 and A1 B1 C1 be any two acute-angled triangles. Consider all triangles ABC that are similar to A1 B1 C1 and circumscribed about triangle A0 B0 C0 (where A0 lies on BC. . . . 1968 1. 4. . and one of whose angles is twice as large as another. in which a1 . . Prove that the product (cm+1 − ck ) (cm+2 − ck ) · · · (cm+n − ck ) is divisible by the product c1 c2 · · · cn . . Suppose that an inﬁnite number of terms of the sequence {cn } are equal to zero. . On 1 the ﬁrst day. Find all natural numbers for which cn = 0. Prove that there is one and only one triangle whose side lengths are consecutive integers. determine the one with maximum area. Find all natural numbers x such that the product of their digits (in decimal notation) is equal to x2 − 10x − 22. . 5. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 3. one medal and 7 of the remaining medals were awarded. 2. How many days did the contest last. . the remaining n medals were awarded. m. there were m medals awarded on n successive days (n > 1). USSR. On the second 1 day. a8 are real numbers not all equal to zero. and how many medals were awarded altogether? 1. where c1 = a 1 + a 2 + · · · + a 8 c2 = a 2 + a 2 + · · · + a 2 1 2 8 . B0 on CA and C0 on AB) Of all such triangles. Let k. Let cs = s (s + 1). In a sport contest.10 10th IMO. On the n-th and last day. Consider the sequence {cn }. cn = a n + a n + · · · + a n 1 2 8 . and so on.14 CHAPTER 1.

ther is more than one solution. . 6. . 1968 3.1. 15 ax2 n−1 + bxn−1 + c = xn ax2 + bxn + c = x1 n with unknowns x1 . > 0. Prove that for this system (a) If (b) If (c) If < 0. For every natural number n. 10T H IMO. xn . c are real and a = 0. give an example of a non-constant function with the requiered properties. there exists a positive number b such that f (x + b) = f (x) for all x) (b) For a = 1. . evaluate the sum ∞ k=0 1 + 2 f (x) − [f (x)]2 n+1 n+2 n + 2k n + 2k = +··· + +···+ 2k+1 2 4 2k+1 (the symbol x denotes the greatest integer not exceding x). x2 . Let 4ac. b. . = 0. Let f be a real-valued function deﬁned for all real numbers x such that. USSR. . for some positive constant a. 5. the equation f (x + a) = holds for all x (a) Prove that the function f is periodic (i. . = (b − 1)2 − 4. ther is no solution.e. Consider the system of equations: ax2 1 ax2 2 + + bx1 bx2 + c = x2 + c = x3 . . where a.10. ther is exactly one solution. Prove than in every tetrahedon there is a vertex such that the three edges meeting there have lengths which are the sides of a triangle.

x2 . 4. the inequality 1 8 1 + 2 ≤ 2 2 x1 y 1 − z 1 x2 y 2 − z 2 (x1 + x2 ) (y1 + y2 ) − (z1 + z2 ) is satisﬁed. γ1 is inscrived in ABC.12 12th IMO. and D is the foot of the perpendicular from C to AB. Given n > 4 points in the plane such that no three are collinear. Give necessary and suﬃcient conditions for equality. Let q1 . r2 and r be the radii of the inscribed circles of the triangles AM C. Let r1 . 2. Prove that there are inﬁnitely many numbers a with the following property: the number z = n4 + a is not prime for any natural number n. a2 . x1 y1 − z1 > 2 0. 1. y2 . For each value of k = 1. Prove that for all real numbers x1 . 2. γ2 . Let M be a point on the sede AB of ABC.16 CHAPTER 1. 4. Romania. BM C and ABC. 3. x2 > 0. and the remaining 6 − k edges of lenght 1. 5. A semicircular arc γ is drawn on AB as diameter. Hungary. z1 . 1970 1. ﬁnd necessary and suﬃcient conditions on the number a > 0 so that there exist a tetrahedron with k edges of length a. y1 . Prove that r r1 r2 · = q1 q2 q . 5. one on each side of CD.11 11th IMO. γ3 . while γ2 and γ3 are both tangent to CD and to γ. Prove that there are at least n−3 convex quadrilaterals whose vertices are four of the given points. Prove that γ1 . all tangent to the line AB. We consider three circles γ1 . . 3. Let a1 . q2 and q be the radii of the excribed circles of the same triangles that lie in the angle ACB. prove that x2 − x1 = mπ for some integer m. and f (x) = cos (a1 + x) + 1 1 1 cos (a2 + x) + cos (a3 + x) + · · · + n−1 cos (an + x) 2 4 2 Given that f (x1 ) = f (x2 ) = 0. 2 2 6. an be real variable. z2 with x1 > 0. . . . 1969 1. Of these. γ2 and γ3 have a second tangent in common. C is a point on γ other than A and B. x2 y2 − z2 > 0. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 1.

all of them are lower than the lowest base . n + 1. . b2 . no three of them are collinear. . . . n + 2. . Find the set of all positive integers n with the property that the set {n. the angle BDC is a right angle. an . Prove that Bn−1 An−1 < ⇐a>b ⇒ An Bn 3. a1 . .1. Prove that (AB + BC + CA)2 ≤ 6 AD 2 + BD 2 + CD 2 For what tetrahedra does equality hold? 6. and let a and b be the two bases of two number systems. these are related as follows: An = xn xn−1 · · · x0 Bn = xn xn−1 · · · x0 such that xn = 0 and xn−1 = 01 . satisfy the condition 1 = a0 ≤ a1 ≤ a2 ≤ · · · ≤ an ≤ ·. . . are deﬁned by n An−1 = xn−1 xn−2 · · · x0 Bn−1 = xn−1 xn−2 · · · x0 bn = k=1 1− ak−1 ak 1 √ ak (a) Prove that 0 ≤ bn < 2 for all n. Consider all posible triangles having these points as vertices. Suppose that the foot H of the perpendicular from D to the plane ABC is the intersection of the altitudes of ABC. Prove that no more than 70% of these triangles are acute-angled. . 12T H IMO. . An−1 and An are numbers in the system with base a and Bn−1 and Bn are numbers in the system with base b. . . 4. In the plane are 100 points. a1 . . n + 3. n + 5} can be partitioned into sets such that the product of the numbers in one set equals the product of the numbers in the other set 5. In the tetrahedron ABCD. such that bn > c for large enough n. Let a. 1 The xi ’s are the digits in the respective bases. bn . prove that there exist numbers a0 . and of course. . n + 4.12. The real numbers a0 . . HUNGARY. The numbers b1 . 1970 17 2. . . b and n be integers greater than 1. (a) Given c with 0 ≤ c < 2.

their common length being 2AC sin(α/2). 1971 1. then: (a1 − a2 ) (a1 − a3 ) · · · (a1 − an ) + (a2 − a1 ) (a2 − a3 ) · · · (a2 − an ) + · · · + (an − a1 ) (an − a2 ) · · · (an − an−1 ) ≤ 0 2. ..14 14th IMO. and that it is false for every other natural number n > 2. We consider all closed polygonal paths of the form XY ZT X deﬁned as follows: X is a point on edge AB distinct from A and B. Prove: (a) If DAB + BCD = CDA + ABC. 3. 4. . let Pi be the polyhedron obtained from P1 by a translation that moves vertex A1 to Ai (i = 2. where α = BAC + CAD + DAB.. 2. . it is possible to select two disjoint subsets whose members havethe same sum. . . Prove that from a set of ten distinct two-digit numbers (in the decimalsystem).... 3. . . Y. j = 1. Prove that the sum of all the elements of the matrix is ≥ n2 /2. P9 have an interiorpoint in common. then among thepolygonal paths.. 3. T are interior points of edges BCCD.18 CHAPTER 1. Prove that for every natural number m. (b) If DAB + BCD = CDA + ABC. 9).. there are exactly m points in S which are at unit distance from A.. DA. 1. If a1 . the sum of the elements in the ith row and the jth column is ≥ n. there is none of minimal length.) contains an inﬁnite subset in which every two members are relatively prime. respectively. Czechoslovakia... Suppose that whenever an element aij = 0. Prove that the following assertion is true for n = 3 and n = 5. All the faces of tetrahedron ABCD are acute-angled triangles. .. 6. similarly.. n) be a square matrix whose elements are non-negative integers. . Consider a convex polyhedron P1 with nine vertices A1 A2 . P2 . . Let A = (aij )(i. a2 . an are arbitrary real numbers. Z. then there areinﬁnitely many shortest polygonal paths. 5. A9 . USSR. there exists a ﬁnite set S of points in a plane with the following property: For every point A in S.. Provethat at least two of the polyhedra P1 .. Prove that the set of integers of the form 2k − 3(k = 2. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 1. 1972 1.13 13th IMO.

Prove that (2m)!(2n)! m!n!(m + n)! is an integer. Pn all lie in a plane containing g and on one side of g. and if |f (x)| ≤ 1 for all x. Prove that if f (x) is not identically zero.. . Given four distinct parallel planes. 1973 19 2. Prove that if n is odd. USSR. Point O lies on line g. . x5 are positive real numbers. 1. then |g(y)| ≤ 1 for all y.15. USSR. x2 . Find all solutions (x1 . x3 . Let m and n be arbitrary non-negative integers. 3. P2 . and satisfying the equation f (x + y) + f (x − y) = 2f (x)g(y) for all x.. x4 . every quadrilateral that can be inscribed in acircle can be dissected into n quadrilaterals each of which is inscribablein a circle. ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 0 0 0 0 0 5.1. .15 15th IMO.. Prove that if n ≥ 4. x2 . x3 . x5 ) of the system of inequalities (x2 − x3 x5 )(x2 − x3 x5 ) 1 2 2 (x2 − x4 x1 )(x2 − x4 x1 ) 3 2 (x3 − x5 x2 )(x2 − x5 x2 ) 4 (x2 − x1 x3 )(x2 − x1 x3 ) 4 5 2 (x5 − x2 x4 )(x2 − x2 x4 ) 1 where x1 . y. 1973 −→ −→ − − −→ − 1. . . . x4 . 15T H IMO. OPn are unit vectors such that points P1 . 6. OP1 . Let f and g be real-valued functions deﬁned for all real values of xand y. prove that there exists a regular tetrahedron with a vertex on each plane. −→ −→ − − −→ − OP1 + OP2 + · · · + OPn ≥ 1 −→ − −→ − Here OM denotes the length of vector OM . (0! = 1) 4. OP2 .

n − 1. For all such pairs (a. 3.20 CHAPTER 1. bn forwhich (b) q < (a) ak < bk for k = 1. then its inverse f −1 is in G.. These three numbers p. < 1 q for k = 1. (c) For every f in G. here the inverse of f (x) = ax + b is f −1 (x) = (x − b)/a. 6. Find n numbers b1 . 2. r satisfy 0 < p < q < r.. and G has the following properties: (b) If f is in G. G is a set of non-constant functions of the real variable x of the form f (x) = ax + b.. Then the cards areshuﬄed again. ﬁnd the minimum value of a2 + b 2 . 1+q (a1 1−q (c) b1 + b2 + · · · + bn < + a2 + · · · + an ). b2 .. here (g ◦ f )(x) = g[f (x)].. . for any two points A and B of M. . Let a and b be real numbers for which the equation x4 + ax3 + bx2 + ax + 1 = 0 has at least one real solution.one can select two other points C and D of M so that lines AB and CD are parallel and not coincident.. q. The radius of action of his detector isequal to half the altitude of the triangle. n.16 16th IMO. What path should he follow in order to travel the least possible distance and still accomplish his mission? 5. Let a1 . there exists a real number xf such that f (xf ) = xf . Determine whether or not there exists a ﬁnite set M of points in spacenot lying in the same plane such that. 1974 1. then g ◦ f is in G. Three players A.. a2 . 2. Thethree cards are shuﬄed and one is dealt to each player. a and b are real numbers. · · · . b). Each then receivesthe number of counters indicated by the card he holds. Prove that there exists a real number k such that f (k) = k for all f in G. and let q be a givenreal number such that 0 < q < 1. The soldier leaves from one vertex of the triangle. . bk+1 bk (a) If f and g are in G. B and C play the following game: On each of three cardsan integer is written. 4. 1. West Germany.. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 2. the counters remain with the players. A soldier needs to check on the presence of mines in a region having theshape of an equilateral triangle. .. an be n positive numbers.

(ii) If ai is the number of white squares in the i-th rectangle. z2 . 1975 21 This process (shuﬄing. prove that n(P ) − deg(P ) ≤ 2. Who received q counters on the ﬁrst round? 2. If n(P ) isthe number of distinct integers k such that (P (k))2 = 1. . giving out counters) takes place for at least two rounds. Let P be a non-constant polynomial with integer coeﬃcients. n) be real numbers such that Prove that. determine all possible sequences a1 . B has 10 and C has 9. dealing. 1975 x1 ≥ x2 ≥ · · · ≥ xn and y1 ≥ y2 ≥ · · · ≥ yn 1. 6.. · · · .17 17th IMO. At the last round B received r counters. where deg(P ) denotes the degree of the polynomial P. c. In the triangle ABC prove that there is a point D on side AB suchthat CD is the geometric mean of AD and DB if and only if sin A sin B ≤ sin2 3. 4.. · · · . a2 . Consider decompositions of an 8 × 8 chessboard into p non-overlapping rectangles subject to the following conditions: (i) Each rectangle has as many white squares as black squares. 5. Let xi . For this value of p. Find the maximum value of p for which such a decomposition is possible. 17T H IMO. 2 23k is not divisible by 5 for any integer n ≥ 0. Prove that the number n k=0 2n+1 2k+1 C . A has 20 counters in all. BULGARIA. Bulgaria. zn is any permutation of y1 .1. then a1 < a2 < · · · < ap .. if z1 . · · · .17. Determine all possible values of S= a b c d + + + a+b+d a+b+c b+c+d a+c+d where a. yi (i = 1. then n i=1 n (xi − yi )2 ≤ i=1 (xi − zi )2 . ap . d are arbitrary positive numbers. y2 . After the last round. 2. yn . b. 1.

the sum of the lengths of two opposite sides and one diagonal is 16. Let P1 (x) = x2 − 2 and Pj (x) = P1 (Pj−1 (x)) for j = 2. triangles ABR. 1. In a plane convex quadrilateral of area 32. P is homogeneous of degree n). 6. Prove that QRP = 90◦ and QR = RP. 1976 1. x. CAQ areconstructed externally with CBP = CAQ = 45◦ . c. 4. 2. b) + P (a + b.Show that. with the following properties: (i) for a positive integer n and all real t. y positive integers and q > p. · · · be an inﬁnite increasing sequence of positive integers. 0) = 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 2. Austria. b. y P (tx. the roots of the equation Pn (x) = x are real and distinct. ty) = tn P (x. the sum of its digits is A. Determine. 3. Let B be the sum of the digits of A. . a) + P (c + a. BCP = ACQ = 30◦ . Determine all possible lengths ofthe other diagonal. for any positive integer n. Let a1 .22 CHAPTER 1. Find the sum of the digits of B. When 44444444 is written in decimal notation. (ii) for all real a. · · ·. Prove that for every p ≥ 1 there are inﬁnitely many am which can be written in the form am = xap + yaq with x. y) (that is. in two variables.18 18th IMO. On the sides of an arbitrary triangle ABC. ABR = BAR = 15◦ . a3. a2 . Find all polynomials P. c) = 0 (iii) P (1. BCP. P (b + c. (A and B are written in decimal notation.) 5. with proof. 3. whether or not one can ﬁnd 1975 points on the circumference of a circle with unit radius such that the distance between any two of them is a rational number.

LM. A rectangular box can be ﬁlled completely with unit cubes. 2. the largest number which is the product of positiveintegers whose sum is 1976. Equilateral triangles ABK. BK. x2 . DAN are constructed inside the square ABCD. CM. un+1 = un (u2 − 2) − u1 for n = 1. so that their edges are parallel to the edges of the box.. A sequence {un } is deﬁned by u0 = 2. 1977 1.. q) are integers.. · · · .19. u1 = 5/2.. 4. AN are the twelve vertices of a regular dodecagon. Yugoslavia. If one places as many cubes as possible. CDM.19 19th IMO. Determine. CL. 2. . Prove that the system has a solution (x1 . . 0. BCL. (c) |xj | ≤ q(j = 1. Prove that the midpoints of the four segments KL. DM. Consider the system of p equations in q = 2p unknowns x1 .. xq ) such that (b) there is at least one value of j for which xj = 0. Determine the possible dimensions of all such boxes.1. x2 . where [x] denotes the greatest integer ≤ x. [un ] = 2[2 n −(−1)n ]/3 (a) all xj (j = 1.. DN. BL. 1977 23 3. in the box. N K and the midpoints of the eight segments AK. · · · n−1 Prove that for positive integers n. 6. . 1. xq : a11 x1 + a12 x2 + · · · + a1q xq = 0 a21 x1 + a22 x2 + · · · + a2q xq = 0 ··· ap1 x1 + ap2 x2 + · · · + apq xq = 0 with every coeﬃcient aij member of the set {−1. 5. with proof. 1}. 19T H IMO. YUGOSLAVIA. each with volume 2. 2. M N. one can ﬁll exactly 40% ofthe box. q). · · · .

}. to the last three digits of 1978n . where f (1) < f (2) < · · · < f (n) < · · · . and let Vn be the set of integers 1+kn. . Let a and b be positive integers. . respectively... B are given. f (n). 6. Find all pairs (a. Prove that there exists a number r ∈ Vn that can be expressed as the product of elements indecomposable in Vn in more than one way.. b. When a2 + b2 is divided by a + b. then a2 + b2 ≤ 2 and A2 + B 2 ≤ 1. In their decimal representations...20 20th IMO. .. P V. The set of all positive integers is the union of two disjoint subsets {f (1). INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 2.. Prove that if f (n + 1) > f (f (n)) for each positive integer n. 1978 1... 5. In a ﬁnite sequence of real numbers the sum of any seven successive terms is negative. where k = 1. Let f (n) be a function deﬁned on the set of all positive integers and having all its values in the same set. g(n). q ∈ Vn such that pq = m. Three mutually perpendicular rays from P intersect the sphere at points U. and P W. . 1. 3. P is a given point inside a given sphere. (Products which diﬀer only in the order of their factors will be considered the same.Determine the maximum number of terms in the sequence.the quotient is q and the remainder is r.. 2. V... .}. and the sum of any eleven successive terms is positive. Find the locus of Q for all such triads of rays from P . 2. Q denotes the vertex diagonally opposite to P in the parallelepiped determined by P U. then f (n) = n for each n.24 CHAPTER 1. Romania.) 4. and W . and f (θ) = 1 − a cos θ − b sin θ − A cos 2θ − B sin 2θ Prove that if f (θ) ≥ 0 for all real θ. f (2). the last three digits of 1978m are equal.. m and n are natural numbers with 1 ≤ m < n. b) suchthat q 2 + r = 1977. 3. A. Find m and n such that m + n has its least value. {g(1). A number m ∈ Vn is called indecomposable in Vn if there do not exist numbers p. Let n be a given integer > 2. Four real constants a. g(2).

.) be a sequence of distinct positive integers.. .21 21st IMO. n.. 1. n n 1 ak ≥ 2 k=1 k k=1 k 6. AB = AC. Every triangle whose vertices are vertices of the prism and whose sides have all been colored has two sides of a diﬀerent color. the distances from P to the moving points are equal. . The list of members contains 1978 names. Prove that for all natural numbers n.. Two circles in a plane intersect. The two points return to A simultaneously after one revolution. A circle is tangent internally to thecircumcircle of triangle ABC and also to sides AB.. Prove that the midpoint of segment P Q is the center of the incircle of triangle ABC. . 25 4. respectively.. Q. 3.. 2. 21ST IMO.. UNITED KINGDOM. A prism with pentagons A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 and B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 as top and bottom faces is given. Show that all 10 sides of the top and bottom faces are the same color. Prove that there is at least one member whose number is the sum of thenumbers of two members from his own country. .. 1979 g(1) < g(2) < · · · < g(n) < · · · and g(n) = f (f (n)) + 1 for all n ≥ 1 Determine f (240). . Prove that there is a ﬁxed point P in the plane such that.. An international society has its members from six diﬀerent countries. Each side of the two pentagons and each of the line-segments Ai Bj for all i. Let p and q be natural numbers such that Prove that p is divisible by 1979. Starting simultaneously from A two points move with constant speeds. 5. 3. United Kingdom. each point travelling along its own circle in the same sense. 2. 1978. at any time.1. or twice as large as the numberof one member from his own country. 5.. In triangle ABC. 2. AC at P. Let A be one of the points of intersection. 1979 p 1 1 1 1 1 = 1− + − +···− + q 2 3 4 1318 1319 1. is colored either red or green. numbered 1. Let {ak }(k = 1. j = 1.21.

Let F (n.26 CHAPTER 1. (ii) for every i.. Pn = E. x3 . ﬁnd all points R in π such that the ratio (QP + P A)/QR is a maximum. Each of these subsets has a smallest member. x5 satisfying the relations 5 5 5 kxk = a. 1 a2n = √ (xn−1 − y n−1 ). AB respectively. P is a point inside a given triangle ABC. Given a plane π. A frog starts jumping at vertex A. n}. Find all P for which BC CA AB + + PD PE PF is least. r) = n+1 r+1 . INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 4. Let A and E be opposite vertices of a regular octagon. 5. . Pi and Pi+1 are adjacent. 3. k=1 k=1 k 3 xk = a 2 . Let a n be the number of distinct paths of exactly n jumps ending at E. r) denote the arithmetic mean of these smallest numbers. When it reaches vertex E. Find all real numbers a for which there exist non-negative real numbers x1 .. 2. 1. Pi is distinct from E. · · · . E. 0 ≤ i ≤ n − 1. A path of n jumps is a sequence of vertices (P0 . n = 1. Washington. Let 1 ≤ r ≤ n and consider all subsets of r elements of theset {1. . 2. 2. Pn ) such that (i) P0 = A. the frog stops and stays there.. F are the feet of the perpendiculars from P to the lines BC.. x2 .22 22nd IMO.. k=1 k 5 xk = a 3 6. 1981 1.D... 2 √ √ where x = 2 + 2 and y = 2 − 2 Note. x4 . it may jump to either of the two adjacent vertices. USA. prove that F (n. (iii) for every i. CA. From any vertex of the octagon except E. 0 ≤ i ≤ n − 1. a point P in this plane and a point Q not in π. Prove that a2n−1 = 0.

y. is the pointwhere the incircle touches side ai . Also. (a) For which values of n > 2 is there a set of n consecutive positive integers such that the largest number in the set is a divisor of the least common multiple of the remaining n − 1 numbers? (b) For which values of n > 2 is there exactly one set having the stated property? 5. and for all i ≥ 0. 2. y) = y + 1. Mi is the midpoint of side ai .. Consider the inﬁnite sequences {xn } of positive real numbers with the following properties: x0 = 1. 1982 1. 1981). A non-isosceles triangle A1 A2 A3 is given with sides a1 . for all m. a3 (ai is the side opposite Ai ). 23RD IMO. y) satisﬁes (1) f (0. (3) f (x + 1. 0) = f (x. 1982 27 3. Determine f (4. Denote by Si the reﬂection of Ti in the interior bisector of angle Ai . Each circle touches a pair of sides of the triangle. and Ti .. Budapest. n ∈ {1. 2. 1. Three congruent circles have a common point O and lie inside a given triangle. f (3) > 0. 3.where m and n are integers satisfying m. 6. BUDAPEST. Hungary.23 23rd IMO.1. HUNGARY. n f (m + n) − f (m) − f (n) = 0 or 1 f (2) = 0. 2. For all i = 1. The function f (n) is deﬁned for all positive integers n and takes on non-negative integer values. 1). f (x + 1. and f (9999) = 3333 Determine f (1982). for all non-negative integers x. Determine the maximum value of m3 + n3 .23. The function f (x. 3. (2)f (x + 1. Prove that the incenter and the circumcenter of the triangle and the point O are collinear. Prove that the lines M1 .. . y + 1) = f (x. xi+1 ≤ xi . S1 . a2 . y)). M2 S2 . and M3 S3 are concurrent. 1981} and (n2 − mn − m2 )2 = 1 4.

An−1 An with A0 = An . The diagonals AC and CE of the regular hexagon ABCDEF are divided by the inner points M and N . while the other touches C1 at Q1 and C2 at Q2 . 1983 1. . Let M1 be the midpoint of P1 Q1 . so that CN AM = =r AC CE Determine r if B.24 24th IMO. Prove that O1 AO2 = M1 AM2 . and the length of that part of L which lies between X and Y is not smaller than 198. and let L be a path within S which does not meet itself and which is composed of line segments A0 A1 . then it has at least three suchsolutions. 1. One of the common tangents to the circles touches C1 at P1 and C2 at P2 . Show that the equation has no solutions in integers when n = 2891 5. Paris.and M2 be the midpoint of P2 Q2 . (ii) f (x) → 0 as x → ∞ 2. Prove that there are two points X and Y in L such that the distance between X and Y is not greater than 1. respectively. 6. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD (a) Prove that for every such sequence. France.999 x1 x2 xn (b) Find such a sequence for which x2 x2 x2 0 + 1 + · · · + n−1 < 4 x1 x2 xn 4.28 CHAPTER 1. Suppose that for every point P of the boundary of S there is a point of L at a distance from P not greater than 1/2. y. y). · · · . and N are collinear. Prove that if n is a positive integer such that the equation x3 − 3xy 2 + y 3 = n has a solution in integers (x. there is an n ≥ 1 such that x2 x2 x2 0 + 1 + · · · + n−1 ≥ 3. Find all functions f deﬁned on the set of positive real numbers which take positive real values and satisfy the conditions: (i) f (xf (y)) = yf (x) for all positive x. M. Let S be a square with sides of length 100. A1 A2 . Let A be one of the two distinct points of intersection of two unequal coplanar circles C1 and C2 with centers O1 and O2 . respectively.

CZECHOSLOVAKIA. y and z are non-negative integers. y and z arenon-negative real numbers for which x + y + z = 1. 1984 0 ≤ yz + zx + xy − 2xyz ≤ 1. Each point of the plane is colored by one of a ﬁnite number ofcolors.where x. Justify your answer. at least one of the two subsets contains the vertices of a right-angled triangle. b and c be positive integers. 5. for every partition of E into two disjoint subsets. Czechoslovakia. no three of which are consecutive terms of an arithmetic progression? Justify your answer. 1.1. Let ABC be an equilateral triangle and E the set of all points contained in the three segments AB. 1984 29 3. . denote by a(X) the measure of the angle between OA and OX in radians. other than O. In the plane two diﬀerent points O and A are given. Prague. Justify your answer. 4. Show that 2abc − ab − bc − ca is the largest integer which cannot be expressed in the form xbc + yca + zab. (ii) (a + b)7 − a7 − b7 is divisible by 77 . Let a. PRAGUE. Find one pair of positive integers a and b such that: (i) ab(a + b) is not divisible by 7. Let C(X) be the circle with center O and radius of length OX + a(X)/OX. no two of which have a common divisor greater than 1.25 25th IMO. Is it possible to choose 1983 distinct positive integers. Let a. BC and CA (including A. B and C). 2. 3. Determine whether. For each point X of the plane. 6. 25T H IMO.25. Prove that 7 27 where x. Prove that there exists a point Y for which a(Y ) > 0 such that its color appears on the circumference of the circle C(Y ). counterclockwise from OA(0 ≤ a(X) < 2π). all less than or equal to 10 5 . Prove that a2 b(a − b) + b2 c(b − c) + c2 a(c − a) ≥ 0 Determine when equality occurs. b and c be the lengths of the sides of a triangle.

Helsinki. Prove that the line AB is a tangent to the circle on CD as diameter if and only if the lines BC and AD are parallel. and let p be its perimeter.26 26th IMO. .. i = k both i and |i − k| have the same color. A circle has center on the side AB of the cyclic quadrilateral ABCD. 1985 1.. Prove that n−3< n 2d < p 2 n+1 −2 2 where [x] denotes the greatest integer not exceeding x. Let a.. Each number in the set M = {1. b. let Qi (x) = (1 + x)i . For any polynomial P (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + ak xk with integer coeﬃcients. 5. The circumscribed circles of the triangles ABC and EBN intersect at exactly two distinct points B and M. 3. Prove that M contains at least one subset of four distinct elements whose product is the fourth power of an integer. Let ABCD be a convex quadrilateral such that the line CD is a tangent to the circle on AB as diameter. It is given that (ii) for each i ∈ M.. c and d be odd integers such that 0 < a < b < c < d and ad = bc. Prove that if i1 i2 . .. 5. Given a set M of 1985 distinct positive integers. Prove that if a + d = 2k and b + c = 2m for some integers k and m. Let d be the sum of the lengths of all the diagonals of a plane convex polygon with n vertices (n > 3). . then a = 1. Provethat angle OM B is a right angle. 6.. both i and n − i have the same color. respectively. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 4. the number of coeﬃcients which are odd is denoted by w(P ). in are integers such that 0 ≤ i1 < i2 < · · · < in then w(Qi1 + Qi2 + · · · + Qin ) ≥ w(Qi1 ) 4. .30 CHAPTER 1. none of which has a prime divisor greater than 26. Prove that all numbers in M must have the same color.. (i) for each i ∈ M. n − 1} is colored either blue or white. The other three sides are tangent to the circle. Finland. 2. A circle with center O passes through the vertices A and C of triangle ABC and intersects the segments AB and BC again at distinct points K and N. Let n and k be given relatively prime natural numbers.. Prove that AD + BC = AB 2. For i = 0. k < n. 1.. 1.

. 2. (iii) f (x) = 0 for 0 ≤ x < 2. . 27T H IMO. construct the sequence x1 . x2 . 3. We construct a set of points P1 .ldots). . WARSAW. such that: (i) f (xf (y))f (y) = f (x + y) for all x. X remaining inside the polygon. Find all functions f . Such an operation is performed repeatedly as long as at least one of the ﬁve numbers is negative. 1. B be adjacent vertices of a regular n-gon (n ≥ 5) in thelane having center at O. by setting xn+1 = xn xn + 1 for each n ≥ 1 n 31 Prove that there exists exactly one value of x1 for which 0 < xn < xn+1 < 1 for every n. 1986 6. Show that one canind distinct a. 1. y. A triangle A1 A2 A3 and a point P0 are given in the plane. Warsaw. If three consecutive vertices are assigned the numbers x. Poland. z respectively and y < 0 then the following operation is allowed: the numbers x. y. A triangle XY Z. POLAND. 1986 1.27. 4. moves in the plane in such a way that Y and Z each trace out the whole boundary of the polygon. z + y respectively. y ≥ 0. To each vertex of a regular pentagon an integer is assigned in such a way that the sum of all ﬁve numbers is positive. P3 . b in the set {2. Let d be any positive integer not equal to 2.. . For every real number x1 . 5. Find the locus of X.. such that Pk+1 is the image of Pk under a rotation withenter Ak+1 through angle 120◦ clockwise (for k = 0. We deﬁne As = As−3 for all s ≥ 4. Prove that if P1986 = P0 . . (ii) f (2) = 0. Determine whether this procedure necessarily comes to and end after a ﬁnite number of steps. or 13. deﬁned on the non-negative real numbers and taking nonnegative real values. which is congruent to andnitially conincides with OAB. −y.1. 2. P2 . d} such that ab − 1 is not perfect square.27 27th IMO. 13. z are replaced by x + y. 5. then the triangle A1 A2 A3 equilateral. . Let A. 5.

Prove that there is no function f from the set of non-negative integers into itself such that f (f (n)) = n + 1987 for every n. . . which have exactly k ﬁxed points. . n}. 5. xn be real numbers satisfying x2 + x2 + · · · + x2 = 1. . .28 28th IMO. Let x1 . an . such that |ai | ≤ k − 1 For all i and √ (k − 1) n |a1 x1 + a1 x2 + · · · + an xn | ≤ kn − 4. From point L perpendiculars are drawn to AB and AC. the feet of theseerpendiculars being K and M respectively.) 2. Prove that if k 2 + k + n is prime for all integers k such that 0 ≤ k ≤ n . Is it always possible to color some of the points in the set rednd the remaining points white in such a way that for any straight line Larallel to either one of the coordinate axes the diﬀerence (in absolutealue) between the numbers of white point and red points on L is not greaterhan 1? 1. Prove that n k=0 k · pn (k) = n! (Remark: A permutation f of a set S is a one-to-one mapping of S onto itself. Havana. a2 . . Prove that for n 2 1 every integer k ≥ 2 there are integers a1 . . . In an acute-angled triangle ABC the interior bisector of the angle A intersects BC at L and intersects the circumcircle of ABC again at N . Let n be an integer greater than or equal to 2. . . . not all 0. An element i in S is called a ﬁxed point of the permutation f if f (i) = i. Cuba . . INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 6. 3. .32 CHAPTER 1. then k 2 + k + n is prime for all integers k such 3 that 0 ≤ k ≤ n − 2. n ≥ 1. x2 . One is given a ﬁnite set of points in the plane. Let n be an integer greater than or equal to 3. Prove that the quadrilateral AKN M and the triangle ABC have equal areas. Let pn (k) be the number of permutations of the set {1. 1987 1. 6. each point having integeroordinates. Prove that there is a set of n points in the plane such that the distance between any two points is irrational and each set of three points determines a non-degenerate triangle with rational area.

29 29th IMO. Consider two coplanar circles of radii R and r (R > r) with the same center. Let n be a positive integer and let A1 .1. L respectively. . 4. S and T denote the areas of the triangles ABC and AKL respectively. A function f is deﬁned on the positive integers by f (1) f (2n) f (4n + 1) f (4n + 3) for all positive integers n. and (c) Every element of B belongs to at least two of the Ai .) (i) Find the set of values of BC 2 + CA2 + AB 2 . . ACD intersects the sides AB. 1988 33 1.29. f (3) = 3. 2. and D is the foot of the altituderom A. 2f (2n + 1) − f (n). f (n). CAMBERRA. The perpendicular l to BP at P meets the smaller circle again at A. Determine the number of positive integers n. A2n+1 be subsets of a set B. (If l is tangent to the circle at P then A = P . The line BP meets the larger circle again at C. ABC is a triangle right-angled at A. AUSTRALIA.how that S ≥ 2T . . A2 . The straight line joining the incenters of the triangles ABD. Australia. for which f (n) = n. less than or equal to 1988. Let P be a ﬁxed point on the smaller circle and B a variable point on the larger circle. the sum of whose lengths is 1988. 5. 70 = = = = 1. 29T H IMO. 1988 1. (ii) Find the locus of the midpoint of BC. Show that set of real numbers x which satisfy the inequality k 5 ≥ 4 k=1 x − k is a union of disjoint intervals. Suppose that (a) Each Ai has exactly 2n elements. 3f (2n + 1) − 2f (n). (b) Each Ai ∩ Aj (1 ≤ i < j ≤ 2n + 1) contains exactly one element. . For which values of n can one assign to every element of B one of the numbers 0 and 1 in such a way that Ai has 0 assigned to exactly n of its elements? 3. AC at the points K. Camberra. .

In an acute-angled triangle ABC the internal bisector of angle A meets their cumcircle of the triangle again at A1 . INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 6. 1989} can be expressed as the disjoint union of subsets Ai (i = 1. Points B0 and C0 are deﬁned similarly. 117) such that: (i) Each Ai contains 17 elements. Show that a2 + b 2 ab + 1 is the square of an integer. Points B1 and C1 are deﬁned similarly. . Braunschweig. . (ii) The area of the triangle A0 B0 C0 is at least four times the area of the triangle ABC. 1. Let n and k be positive integers and let S be a set of n points in the plane such that (i) No three points of S are collinear.30 30th IMO. and (ii) For any point P of S there are at least k points of S equidistant from P . 1989 1. 2. . 2. Let ABCD be a convex quadrilateral such that the sides AB. Prove that for each positive integer n there exist n consecutive positive integers none of which is an integral power of a prime number. . AD. Let a and b be positive integers such that ab + 1 divides a2 + b2 . 3. Prove that: (i) The area of the triangle A0 B0 C0 is twice the area of the hexagon AC1 BA1 CB1 . Prove that: k< 1 √ + 2n 2 4. . . 2. Prove that the set {1. Let A0 be the point of intersection of the line AA1 with the external bisectors of angles B and C. . BC satisfy AB = AD + BC. Show that: 1 1 1 √ ≥√ +√ h AD BC 5. (ii) The sum of all the elements in each Ai is the same. West Germany. There exists a point P inside the quadrilateral at a distance h from the line CD such that AP = h + AD and BP = h + BC.34 CHAPTER 1. . .

. 1989 35 6. . xm ) of the set {1. 2n − 1}. WEST GERMANY. . BRAUNSCHWEIG. 2. . . there are more permutations with property P than without. 2. . 2n}.30. Show that. . . is said to have property P if |xi − xi+1 | = n for at least one i in {1. for each n. . . x2 . 30T H IMO. A permutation (x1 . . where n is a positive integer.1. . .

31 31st IMO. Such a coloring is “good” if there is at least one pair of black points such that the interior of one of the arcs between them contains exactly n points from E. E. .36 CHAPTER 1. Construct a function f : Q+ → Q+ such that f (x) f (xf (y)) = y + for all x. 2k Knowing n2k+1 . If AM = t. People’s Republic of China. Given an initial integer n0 > 1. 2. B chooses any integer n2k+2 such that n2k+1 n2k+2 EG EF . Let n ≥ 3 and consider a set E of 2n − 1 distinct points on a circle. 4. respectively. 1990 1. n2 . 5. n3 . 3. . alternately according to the following rules: Knowing n2k . . and M intersects the lines BC and AC at F and G. A and B. The tangent line at E to the circle through D. two players. Let M be an interior point of the segment EB. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 1. Suppose that exactly k of these points are to be colored black. A chooses any integer n2k+1 such that n2k ≤ n2k+1 ≤ n2 . AB ﬁnd in terms of t. Find the smallest value of k so that every such coloring of k points of E is good. Beijing. Let Q+ be the set of positive rational numbers. y in Q . Chords AB and CD of a circle intersect at a point E inside the circle. choose integers n1 . Determine all integers n > 1 such that 2n + 1 n2 is an integer.

. 3. 1991 2. . . 37 Player A wins the game by choosing the number 1990. 3. ak be all the natural numbers less than n and relatively prime to n. For which n0 does: (b) B have a winning strategy? (a) A have a winning strategy? (c) Neither player have a winning strategy? 6. v belongs to at most one edge. . . . 19902 in some order. B . Sigtuna. C respectively. 280}. y there is some sequence of vertices x = v0 . (b) The lengths of the 1990 sides are the numbers 12 . . SIGTUNA. 2.1. .32 32nd IMO. . 1991 is a prime raised to a positive integer power. Prove that AI · BI · CI 8 1 < ≤ 4 AA · BB · CC 27 . . Given a triangle ABC. Let n > 6 be an integer and a1 .32. . 2. . together with a set of edges joining certain pairs of distinct vertices. Each pair of vertices u. the greatest common divisor of the integers labeling those edges is equal to 1. . Suppose G is a connected graph with k edges. C meet the opposite sides in A . let I be the center of its inscribed circle. If a2 − a1 = a3 − a2 = · · · = ak − ak−1 > 0 prove that n must be either a prime number or a power of 2. called vertices. a2 . The internal bisectors of the angles A. vi+1 (0 ≤ i < m) is joined by an edge of G. Sweden. . B. The graph G is connected if for each pair of distinct vertices x. . v1 . . Find the smallest integer n such that each n-element subset of S contains ﬁve numbers which are pairwise relatively prime. 32 . . . 22 . Let S = {1. k in such a way that at each vertex which belongs to two or more edges. 1. [A graph consists of a set of points. v2 . vm = y such that each pair vi . Prove that there exists a convex 1990-gon with the following two properties: (a) All angles are equal. SWEDEN.] 1. 32N D IMO. player B wins by choosing the number 1. Prove that it is possible to label the edges 1. 4. . .

c with 1 < a < b < c such that 2. Moscow.38 CHAPTER 1. Let R denote the set of all real numbers. (Note: The orthogonal projection of a point onto a plane is the foot of the perpendicular from that point to the plane. j. R on L such that M is the midpoint of QR and C is the inscribed circle of triangle P QR. Given any real number a > 1. 5. x1 . . respectively. Consider nine points in space. Prove that |S|2 ≤ |Sx | · |Sy | · |Sz | where |A| denotes the number of elements in the ﬁnite set |A|. Sy . P BC. 6. Sz be the sets consisting of the orthogonal projections of the points of S onto the yz-plane. Let ABC be a triangle and P an interior point of ABC. L a line tangent to the circle C. . . Show that at least one of the angles P AB. An inﬁnite sequence x0 . Russia.33 33rd IMO. the set of colored edges necessarily contains a triangle all of whose edges have the same color. 1992 (a − 1)(b − 1)(c − 1) is a divisor of abc − 1 1. . y ∈ R 3. Find the locus of all points P with the following property: there exists two points Q. x2 . a line segment) and each edge is either colored blue or red or left uncolored. Find all functions f : R → R such that f x2 + f (y) = y + (f (x))2 forall x. such that |xi − xj ||i − j|a ≥ 1 for every pair of distinct nonnegative integers i. Each pair of points is joined by an edge (that is. Find the smallest value of n such that whenever exactly n edges are colored. zx-plane. 4. . no four of which are coplanar. 1. In the plane let C be a circle. of real numbers is said to be bounded if there is a constant C such that |xi | ≤ C for every i ≥ 0. x1 . xy -plane. construct a bounded inﬁnite sequence x0 . and M a point on L. . INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 5.) . Find all integers a. P CA is less than or equal to 30◦ . Let S be a ﬁnite set of points in three-dimensional space. x2 . Let Sx . b.

1.34. 34T H IMO, ISTAMBUL, TURKEY, 1993

39

6. For each positive integer n, S(n) is deﬁned to be the greatest integer such that, for every positive integer k ≤ S(n), n2 can be written as the sum of k positive squares. (a) Prove that S(n) ≤ n2 − 14 for each n ≥ 4.

(b) Find an integer n such that S(n) = n2 − 14.

(c) Prove that there are inﬁntely many integers n such that S(n) = n2 − 14.

1.34

34th IMO, Istambul, Turkey, 1993

1. Let f (x) = xn + 5xn−1 + 3, where n > 1 is an integer. Prove that f (x) cannot be expressed as the product of two nonconstant polynomials with integer coeﬃcients. 2. Let D be a point inside acute triangle ABC such that ∠ADB = AC · BD = AD · BC. (a) Calculate the ratio (AB · CD)/(AC · BD). (b) Prove that the tangents at C to the circumcircles of perpendicular. ACD and BCD are ACB + π/2 and

3. On an inﬁnite chessboard, a game is played as follows. At the start, n2 pieces are arranged on the chessboard in an n by n block of adjoining squares, one piece in each square. A move in the game is a jump in a horizontal or vertical direction over an adjacent occupied square to an unoccupied square immediately beyond. The piece which has been jumped over is removed. Find those values of n for which the game can end with only one piece remaining on the board. 4. For three points P, Q, R in the plane, we deﬁne m(P QR) as the minimum length of the three altitudes of P QR. (If the points are collinear, we set m(P QR) = 0.) Prove that for points A, B, C, X in the plane, m(ABC) ≤ m(ABX) + m(AXC) + m(XBC) 5. Does there exist a function f : N → N such that f (1) = 2, f (f (n)) = f (n) + n for all n ∈ N, and f (n) < f (n + 1) for all n ∈ N?

40

CHAPTER 1. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 6. There are n lamps L0 , . . . , Ln−1 in a circle (n > 1), where we denote Ln+k = Lk . (A lamp at all times is either on or oﬀ.) Perform steps s0 , s1 , . . . as follows: at step si , if Li−1 is lit, switch Li from on to oﬀ or vice versa, otherwise do nothing. Initially all lamps are on. Show that: (a) There is a positive integer M (n) such that after M (n) steps all the lamps are on again; (b) If n = 2k , we can take M (n) = n2 − 1; (c) If n = 2k + 1, we can take M (n) = n2 − n + 1.

1.35

35th IMO, Hong Kong, 1994

1. Let m and n be positive integers. Let a1 , a2 , . . . , am be distinct elements of {1, 2, . . . , n} such that whenever ai +aj ≤ n for some i, j, 1 ≤ i ≤ j ≤ m, there exists k, 1 ≤ k ≤ m, with ai + aj = ak . Prove that a1 + a 2 + · · · + a m n+1 ≥ m 2 2. ABC is an isosceles triangle with AB = AC. Suppose that (a) M is the midpoint of BC and O is the point on the line AM such that OB is perpendicular to AB; (b) Q is an arbitrary point on the segment BC diﬀerent from B and C; (c) E lies on the line AB and F lies on the line AC such that E , Q, F are distinct and collinear. Prove that OQ is perpendicular to EF if and only if QE = QF . 3. For any positive integer k, let f (k) be the number of elements in the set {k + 1, k + 2, . . . , 2k} whose base 2 representation has precisely three 1s. (a) Prove that, for each positive integer m, there exists at least onepositive integer k such that f (k) = m. (b) Determine all positive integers m for which there exists exactly one k with f (k) = m.

1.36. 36T H IMO, TORONTO, CANADA, 1995 4. Determine all ordered pairs (m, n) of positive integers such that n3 + 1 mn − 1 is an integer.

41

5. Let S be the set of real numbers strictly greater than −1. Find all functions f : S → S satisfying the two conditions: (a) f (x + f (y) + xf (y)) = y + f (x) + yf (x) for all x and y in S; (b)

f (x) x

is strictly increasing on each of the intervals −1 < x < 0 and 0 < x.

6. Show that there exists a set A of positive integers with the following property: For any inﬁnite set S of primes there exist two positive integers m ∈ A and n ∈ A each / of which is a product of k distinct elements of S for some k ≥ 2.

1.36

36th IMO, Toronto, Canada, 1995

1. Let A, B, C, D be four distinct points on a line, in that order. The circles with diameters AC and BD intersect at X and Y . The line XY meets BC at Z. Let P be a point on the line XY other than Z. The line CP intersects the circle with diameter AC at C and M , and the line BP intersects the circle with diameter BD at B and N . Prove that the lines AM, DN, XY are concurrent. 2. Let a, b, c be positive real numbers such that abc = 1. Prove that a3 (b 1 1 1 3 + 3 + 3 ≥ + c) b (c + a) c (a + b) 2

3. Determine all integers n > 3 for which there exist n points A1 , . . . , An in the plane, no three collinear, and real numbers r1 , . . . , rn such that for 1 ≤ i < j < k ≤ n, the area of Ai Aj Ak is ri + rj + rk . 4. Find the maximum value of x0 for which there exists a sequence x0 , x1 . . . , x1995 of positive reals with x0 = x1995 , such that for i = 1, . . . , 1995, xi−1 + 2 xi−1 = 2xi + 1 xi

Let p be an odd prime number. 2. India. 2p} are there. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 5. BC is parallel to EF . Let RA . What is the least possible value that can be taken on by the smaller of these two squares? 5. BCD. Show that AP. The task is to ﬁnd a sequence of moves leading from the square with A as a vertex to the square with B as a vertex. respectively. and CD is parallel to F A. 1996 1. Let P be a point inside triangle ABC such that AP C − ABC AP B − ACB = Let D. AP C. E be the incenters of triangles AP B. (c) Can the task be done when r = 97? 2. CE meet at a point. (a) Show that the task cannot be done if r is divisible by 2 or 3. We are given a positive integer r and a rectangular board ABCD with dimensions |AB| = 20. Find all functions f from S to itself such that f (m + f (n)) = f (f (m)) + f (n) ∀m.37 37th IMO. DEF . The following moves are permitted on the board: one can move from one square to √ another only if the distance between the centers of the two squares is r. RE denote the circumradii of triangles F AB. . RC . 6. The rectangle is divided into a grid of 20 × 12 unit squares. . The positive integers a and b are such that the numbers 15a + 16b and 16a − 15b are both squares of positive integers. Let S denote the set of nonnegative integers. How many p-element subsets A of {1. . BD. (b) Prove that the task is possible when r = 73. the sum of whose elements is divisible by p? 1. Provethat AG + GB + GH + DH + HE ≥ CF . .42 CHAPTER 1. n ∈ S 4. Let ABCDEF be a convex hexagon with AB = BC = CD and DE = EF = F A. Mumbai. |BC| = 12. respectively. 3. Suppose G and H are points in theinterior of the hexagon such that AGB = DHE = 2π/3. and let P denote the perimeter of the hexagon. such that BCD = EF A = π/3. Let ABCDEF be a convex hexagon such that AB is parallel to DE.

n) < C for all m and n. In the plane the points with integer coordinates are the vertices of unit squares.38 38th IMO. The perpendicular bisectors of AB and AC meet the line AU at V and W . respectively. xn ) be an (n + 1)tuple of integers satisfying the following conditions: (a) x0 = xn = 0. . Let f (m. n} for all m and n. The squares are colored alternately black and white (as on a chessboard). Let p. Let (x0 . consider a right-angled triangle whose vertices have integer coordinates and whose legs. Let x1 . The lines BV and CW meet at T . of lengths m and n. n) ≤ 1 2 max{m. n). n) = |S1 − S2 | (a) Calculate f (m. n) for all positive integers m and n which are eitheroth even or both odd. . 1997 Prove that RA + R C + R E ≥ 43 P 2 6. . such that xi = xj .1. (c) Show that there is no constant C such that f (m. . 38T H IMO. (b) For each i with 1 ≤ i ≤ n. For any pair of positive integers m and n. Mar del Plata. MAR DEL PLATA. n be three positive integers with p + q < n. . x1 . Show that there exist indices i < j with (i. endenumerate 2. Let S1 be the total area of the black part of the triangle and S2 be the total area of thehite part. Argentina. The points B and C divide the circumcircle of the triangle into two arcs. q. 1. j) = (0.38. either xi − xi−1 = p or xi − xi−1 = −q. xn be real numbers satisfying the conditions |x1 + x2 + · · · + xn | = 1 . 1997 1. x2 . . (b) Prove that f (m. The angle at A is the smallest angle of triangle ABC. ARGENTINA. Let U be an interior point of the arc between B and C which does not contain A. . .ie along edges of the squares. Show that AU = T B + T C 3.

Find all pairs (a. Each judge rates each contestant as either pass or fail. y2 . . 2. . 1998 1. 2 + 1 + 1. Taiwan. Prove that. . n 2 Show that there exists a permutation y1 .39 39th IMO. . 2. for any integer n ≥ 3. 2. 2n 2 /4 2 < f (2n ) < 2n 2 /2 . xn such that |xi | ≤ |y1 + 2y2 + · · · + nyn | ≤ n+1 2 4. Prove that ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral if and only if the triangles ABP and CDP have equal areas. b) of integers a. In a competition. the diagonals AC and BD are perpendicular and the opposite sides AB and DC are not parallel. . . for each i = 1. . where the perpendicular bisectors of AB and DC meet. . their ratings coincide for at most k contestants. f (4) = 4. Taipei. . . For instance.44 and CHAPTER 1. . INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD n+1 i = 1. In the convex quadrilateral ABCD. . 2. . let f (n) denote the number of ways of representing n as a sum of powers of 2 with nonnegative integer exponents. . (b) silver matrices exist for inﬁnitely many values of n. For each positive integer n . 2 + 2. 1 + 1 + 1 + 1. . Prove that k/a ≥ (b − 1)/(2b). there are a contestants and b judges. Suppose k is a number such that. Suppose that the point P . yn of x1 . n. where b ≥ 3 is an odd integer. . . x2 . Show that (a) there is no silver matrix for n = 1997. 5. . is inside ABCD. An n × n matrix whose entries come from the set S = {1. 1. 2n − 1} is called a silver matrix if. . b ≥ 1 that satisfy the equation ab = b a 6. because the number 4 can be represented in the following four ways: 4.epresentations which diﬀer only in the ordering of their summands are considered to be the same. for any two judges. the ith row and the ith column together contain all elements of S. . .

Determine all pairs (a. ROMANIA. Let the incircle of ABC touch the sides BC. Determine all ﬁnite sets S of at least three points in the plane which satisfy the following condition: for any two distinct points A and B in S. and AB at K. N unit squares on the board are marked in such a way that every square (marked or unmarked) on the board is adjacent to at least one marked square. We say that two diﬀerent squares on the board are adjacent if they have a common side. b) of positive integers such that ab2 + b + 7 divides a2 b + a + b. (a) Determine the least constant C such that the inequality xi xj (x2 + x2 ) ≤ C i j 4 1≤i<j≤n 1≤i≤n holds for all real numbers x1 . Consider an n × n square board. respectively. . 6. Determine the least possible value of f (1998). For any positive integer n. Bucharest. 40T H IMO. The line through B parallel to M K meets the lines LM and LK at R and S. The board is divided into n2 unit squares. determine when equality holds. Prove that angle RIS is acute.40 40th IMO. · · · . Determine all positive integers k such that d(n2 )/d(n) = k for some n. let d(n) denote the number of positive divisors of n (including 1 and n itself). xi (b) For this constant C. Let n be a ﬁxed integer. 3. 1999 1. 2. Consider all functions f from the set N of all positive integers into itself satisfying f (t2 f (s)) = s(f (t))2 for all s and t in N . CA. with n ≥ 2. 4. 1999 45 3.1. Determine the smallest possible value of N . where n is a ﬁxed even positive integer. 1. BUCHAREST. respectively. the perpendicular bisector of the line segment AB is an axis of symmetry for S. xn ≥ 0. L. and M . Let I be the incenter of triangle ABC.40. 5. Romania.

AB Determine all the values of λ such that for any point M on the line and any initial position of the n ﬂeas. let the ﬂea at A jump to the point C on the line to the right of B with BC = λ. Let n ≥ 2 be a positive integer. Prove that: a−1+ 1 b b−1+ 1 c c−1+ 1 ≤1 a 3. For a positive real number λ. with A to the left of B. deﬁne a move as follows: choose any two ﬂeas at points A and B. there is a sequence of moves that will take all the ﬂeas to the position to the right of M . . p) of positive integers such that p is a prime. and are tangent to G at the distinct points M and N . so that M lies closer to than N . Line is tangent to the circles at A and B. Taejon. Let a. 1. b.41 41st IMO. not all at the same point. let lines AN and CD meet at P . and (p − 1)n + 1 is divisible by np−1 . 5. The line passing through the two points of intersection of G1 and G2 meets G at A and B. INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 4. 2000 1. 2. Prove that CD is tangent to G2 . respectively. 6. is parallel to and passes through M . The lines M A and M B meet G1 at C and D. and let lines BN and CD meet at Q. Two circles ω1 and ω2 intersect at M and N . there are n ﬂeas on a horizontal line.46 CHAPTER 1. Two circles G1 and G2 are contained inside the circle G. respectively. G1 passes through the center of G2 . Prove that EP = EQ. South Korea. y. Let lines AC and BD meet at E. Determine all functions f : R −→ R such that f (x − f (y)) = f (f (y)) + xf (y) + f (x) − 1 for all real numbers x. respectively. n not exceeded 2p. Determine all pairs (n. Line CD. c be positive real numbers such that abc = 1. with C on ω1 and D on ω2 . Initially.

The incircle of the triangle ABC touches the sides BC. a red one. 42N D IMO. Let AH1 . Let P on BC be the foot of the altitude from A. USA. • For each girl and each boy. T3 T1 . 2001 47 4. Twenty-one girls and twenty-one boys took part in a mathematical contest. triangle ABC. CA. He puts them into three boxes. . Let the lines 1 . AB at T1 . respectively. choose one card from each and announces the sum of the numbers on the chosen cards. USA. CH3 be the altitudes of an acute-angled triangle ABC. T2 . Let ABC be an acute-angled triangle with circumcentre O. WASHINGTON DC. a white one and a blue one. A magician has one hundred cards numbered 1 to 100. 2001 1. Prove that a b c +√ 2 +√ 2 ≥1 + 8bc b + 8ca c + 8ab for all positive real numbers a. respectively. T1 T2 . Given this sum. • Each contestant solved at most six problems. √ a2 3. Prove that 1 . b and c. 2 .42 42nd IMO.1.42. Suppose that BCA ≥ ABC + 30◦ . BH2 . 3 be the reﬂections of the lines H2 H3 . Washington DC. 6. 3 determine a triangle whose vertices lie on the incircle of the 1. 2 . Prove that CAB + COP < 90◦ 2. so that each box contain at least one card. the magician identiﬁes the box from which no card has been choosen. A member of the audience selects two of the three boxes. and 2n + 1 is divisible by n. How many ways are there to put all the cards into the boxes so that this trick always works? (Two ways are considered diferent if at least one of card is put nto a diﬀerent box) 5. T3 . Determine whether or not there exists a positive integer n such that: n is divisible by exactely 2000 diﬀerent prime numbers. H3 H1 H1 H2 in the lines T2 T3 . at least one problem was solved by both of them Prove that there was a problem that was solved by at least three girls and at least three boys.

.43 43rd IMO. . Find all pairs of integers m > 2. n. d be integers with a > b > c > d > 0. . . (a) Prove that D < n2 . 2. dk = n. k) is red and h ≤ h. United Kingdom. kn be given integers. For each of the n! permutations a = (a1 . a2 . Show that J is the incenter of triangle CEF . k2 . with Q on CA. EF is the chord which is the perpendicular bisector of AO. . with P on BC. k ≤ k. D is the midpoint of the minor arc AB. b. . In a triangle ABC. . 2. . such that n! is a divisor of S (b)−S (c). BC is a diameter of a circle center O. A type 1 subset of S has n blue elements with diﬀerent ﬁrst member and a type 2 subset of S has n blue elements with diﬀerent second member. 4. k ) is also red. A is any point on the circle with ∠AOC > 60o . INTERNATIONAL MATHEMATICS OLYMPIAD 4. Glascow. 2002 1. . then (h . . Show that there are the same number of type 1 and type 2 subsets. so that d1 = 1. k non-negative integers such that h + k < n. c. and let BQ bisect ABC.48 CHAPTER 1. n > 2 such that there are inﬁnitely many positive integers k for which k n + k 2 − 1 divides k m + k − 1. What are the possible angles of triangle ABC? 6. so that if (h. S is the set of all (h. The line through O parallel to AD meets AC at J. Suppose that ac + bd = (b + d + a − c) (b + d − a + c) Prove ab + cd is not a prime. Let n be an odd integer greater than 1. It is known that BAC = 60◦ and that AB + BP = AQ + QB. 5. . The positive divisors of the integer n > 1 are d1 < d2 < . k) with h. . let n S (a) = i=1 ki ai Prove that there are two permutations b and c. Let d = d1 d2 + d2 d3 + · · · + dk−1 dk . 1. Each element of S is colored red or blue. 3. < dk . let AP bisect BAC. an ) of 1. . . (b) Determine all n for which D is a divisor of n2 . Let a. and let k1 . .

. ≤ xn . 2003 1.44 44th IMO. Let n be a positive integer and x1 . 49 6. . CA and AB. Japan. . . t100 in S such that the sets Aj = {x + tj | x ∈ A} j = 1. (a) Prove that n n i=1 j=1 (b) Show that the equality holds if and only if x1 . O2 . |xi − xj | ≤ 2 2(n2 − 1) n n (xi − xj )2 3 i=1 j=1 . Show that 1≤i<j≤n Oi1 j ≤ (n−1)π O 4 1. there exists a prime q such that np − p is not divisible by q for any positive integer n. . .1. · · · . xn form an arithmetic sequence. n > 2 circles of radius 1 are drawn in the plane so that no line meets more than two of the circles. TOKYO. t in R. Find all pairs (m. Their centers are O1 . . Q and R be the feet of perpendiculars from D to lines BC. JAPAN. respectively. . . Show that for each prime p. A convex hexagon is given in which any two opposite sides have the following property: √ the distance between their midpoints is 3/2 times the sum of their lengths. xn be real numbers with x1 ≤ x2 ≤ . Showhat P Q = QR if and only if the bisectors of angles ABC and ADC meet on segment AC. . . 2. 2003 5. . . 1000000}. (A convex ABCDEF has three pairs of opposite sides: AB and DE. CD and F A. x2 . z. . BC and EF . n) of positive integers such that m2 2mn2 −n3 +1 is a positive integer. Let A be a 101-element subset of the set S = {1. Let ABCD be a cyclic quadrilateral. 5. 2. . x2 .) 4. Prove that all the angles of the hexagon are equal.44. 44T H IMO. . . 3. . 100 are pairwise disjoint. t2 . . Prove that there exist numbers t1 . . y. . 6. Let P. Find all functions f from the set R of real numbers to itself such that (f (x) + f (z))(f (y) + f (t)) = f (xy − zt) + f (xt + yz) for all x. Tokyo. 2. . On .

deﬁne a sequence {am (j)}. For any polygon X. am (j + 1) = (am (j))2 + 2am (j). where a. 10}. Find the maximum value. 50 j ≥ 0. c. 8. Let T be an acute triangle. 1. or show that no maximum exists. let A(X) denote the area of X. 7. A3 ) of sets which have the property that (i) A1 ∪ A2 ∪ A3 = {1. and (ii) A1 ∩ A2 ∩ A3 = ∅. . Evaluate limn→∞ an (n). of A(R)+A(S) . with one side along the side of R. Express your answer in the form 2a 3b 5c 7d . 2. For each integer m ≥ 0. 3. 6. where T ranges over all triangles and A(T ) R. . Let d be a real number. b. 4. 3. and the other two sides of T . . Then inscribe a rectangle S in the triangle formed by the side of R opposite the side on the boundary of T . d are nonnegative integers. 5. 2.Chapter 2 William Lowell Putnam Competition 2. A2 . 2. by the condition am (0) = d/2m . . Inscribe a rectangle R in T with one side along a side of T . Determine. j = 0.1 46th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. with proof. 1985 1. S over all rectangles as above. the number of ordered triples (A1 . 9.

. Let Im = Im = 0? 2π 0 cos(x) cos(2x) · · · cos(mx) dx. 8. . 1 ≤ m ≤ 10 is 6. be a doubly inﬁnite array of positive integers. with proof. 1985 51 4. a polynomial g(x) with real coeﬃcients such that (i) g(0) = 1.2 a2. 46T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. m4 . m3 . If p(x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + am xm is a polynomial with real coeﬃcients ai . Let a1. fn (0) = 0 for n ≥ 1.3 a2.2 a1. m2 . . Find. with proof. Prove that am. . with proof. m3 . and (ii) Γ(f (x)n ) = Γ(g(x)n ) for every integer n ≥ 1. m2 .1.. then set 2 Γ(p(x)) = a0 + a2 + · · · + a2 .. 7. m5 for which this minimum k is achieved.3 a3.. . the explicit factorization of f100 (1) into powers of distinct primes. 9. 1 m Let F (x) = 3x2 + 7x + 2. and suppose each positive integer appears exactly eight times in the array.. . Let k be the smallest positive integer for which there exist distinct integers m1 ..2..1 a2. a set of integers m1 . Deﬁne a sequence {ai } by a1 = 3 and ai+1 = 3ai for i ≥ 1. .1 a3. For which integers m. Find. Which integers between 00 and 99 inclusive occur as the last two digits in the decimal expansion of inﬁnitely many ai ? 5. . m4 . Find.. . Deﬁne polynomials fn (x) for n ≥ 0 by f0 (x) = 1. m5 such that the polynomial p(x) = (x − m1 )(x − m2 )(x − m3 )(x − m4 )(x − m5 ) has exactly k nonzero coeﬃcients.1 a1. . . . and d fn+1 (x) = (n + 1)fn (x + 1) dx for n ≥ 0. . n). .3 .2 a3.n > mn for some pair of positive integers (m.

Let f (n) be the number of n × n matrices A satisfying the following two conditions: (a) Each entry αi. 1986 1. (b) The sum of the n entries of a transversal is the same for all transversals of A. 2. Find. A point p is chosen randomly on the circumference C and another point q is chosen randomly from the interior of C (these points are chosen independently and uniformly over their domains). rightmost) digit of 1020000 ? 10100 + 3 3.e. 12. which form a group under matrix multiplication. no two in the same row or column. the maximum value of f (x) = x3 − 3x on the set of all real numbers x satisfying x4 + 36 ≤ 13x2 . A transversal of an n × n matrix A consists of n entries of A. with explanation. 0. An example of such a matrix A is −1 0 −1 A = 0 1 0 . 2. 1}.j of A is in the set {−1. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 10.52 CHAPTER 2. You may assume that −∞ e−x dx = π. Evaluate 0∞ t−1/2 e−1985(t+t ) dt. Suppose that r tr(Mi ) = 0. 1 ≤ i ≤ r. 4. where Arccot t for t ≥ 0 denotes the number θ in n=0 the interval 0 < θ ≤ π/2 with cot θ = t.2 47th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition.. 0 1 0 . Let C be the unit circle x2 +y 2 = 1. Evaluate ∞ Arccot(n2 + n + 1). What is the probability that no point of R lies outside of C? √ −1 2 ∞ 11. Let R be the rectangle with sides parallel to the x and y-axes with diagonal pq. where tr(A) denotes the i=1 r trace of the matrix A. What is the units (i. Let G be a ﬁnite set of real n × n matrices {Mi }. Prove that i=1 Mi is the n × n zero matrix.

Let n and p be positive integers with p prime. 9. 1 ≤ j ≤ n. For f and g in Γ and m a positive integer. . where x. Inscribe a rectangle of base b and height h in a circle of radius one. let f ≡ g (mod m) mean that every coeﬃcient of f − g is an integral multiple of m. . Suppose f1 (x). Let Γ consist of all polynomials in x with integer coeﬃcienst. . 1 ≤ i ≤ n. . y − z. . f2 (x). . g. (A linear function is one of the form a0 + a1 x1 + a2 x2 + · · · + an xn . and F G ≡ h (mod pn ). a2 . 47T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. y. . an ). an be real numbers. . . 5. Prove that there is a function g(x) on Rn such that fi + ∂g/∂xi is linear for all i. b2 . bn be distinct positive integers. 1 3 53 where the ai ’s and bi ’s are rational numbers. . and inscribe an isosceles triangle in the region of the circle cut oﬀ by one base of the rectangle (with that side as the base of the triangle).2. . Prove that there are only a ﬁnite number of possibilities for the ordered triple T = (x − y. . 7. . z are complex numbers satisfying the simultaneous equations x(x − 1) + 2yz = y(y − 1) + 2zx + z(z − 1) + 2xy. .) 6. . fn (x) are functions of n real variables x = (x1 . . and list all such triples T . xn ) with continuous second-order partial derivatives everywhere on Rn . . and let b1 . . a2 .2. z − x). . Suppose further that there are constants cij such that ∂fj ∂fi − = cij ∂xj ∂xi for all i and j. . 1 ≤ i ≤ n. bn and n (but independent of a1 . i=1 Find a simple expression (not involving any sums) for f (1) in terms of b1 . Given that f. G ≡ g (mod p). Let a1 . . prove that there exist F and G in Γ with F ≡ f (mod p). r and s are in Γ with rf + sg ≡ 1 (mod p) and f g ≡ h (mod p). h. 1986 Determine with proof a formula for f (n) of the form n f (n) = a1 bn + a2 b2 + a3 bn + a4 . Suppose that there is a polynomial f (x) satisfying the identity n (1 − x) f (x) = 1 + n a i xb i . . . . For what value of h do the rectangle and triangle have the same area? 8. . b2 .

(x. y. 2. q. If the 10n -th digit in this sequence occurs in the part of the sequence in which the m-digit numbers are placed. y. y. z). Here I is the n × n identity matrix. 11. x2 + y 2 (x. The sequence of digits 123456789101112131415161718192021 . let G(r) be the minimum value of |r − m2 + 2n2 | for all integers m and n. + y2 1. and if M is an n × n matrix. q(x. y. y) : 3x2 y − 3x − y 3 = 0 . with proof. ±y. . D are n × n matrices with entries in a ﬁeld F . . For example. z). Prove that AT D + C T B = I. q(x.3 48th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. 2. z) = x2 + y 2 + z 2 + xyz. z). Prove or disprove the assertion that limr→∞ G(r) exists and equals 0. 12. y) : 2xy + x2 y =3 . satisfying the conditions that AB T andCD T are symmetric and AD T − BC T = I. f (1987). y. z). C. z). B. ±z. Suppose A. y. Let f (x.54 CHAPTER 2. r consists of some permutation of ±x. deﬁne f (n) to be m. y. 1987 x . (x. z)) = f (x. y) : x3 − 3xy 2 + 3y = 1 . f (2) = 2 because the 100th digit enters the sequence in the placement of the two-digit integer 55. Find. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION √ 10. Prove or disprove the assertion that the sequence p. is obtained by writing the positive integers in order. Let p(x. For a positive real number r. z) be polynomials with real coeﬃcients satisfying f (p(x. y) : x2 − y 2 = (x. y. . r(x. where the number of minus signs is 0 or 2. r(x. Curves A. B. C and D are deﬁned in the plane as follows: A = B = C = D = Prove that A ∩ B = C ∩ D. M T is its transpose.

y. 1) = 6. in three variables and F be a function of two variables such that P (ux. C be complex numbers with P (A. y. y) = −y x . z). Evaluate 4 2 ∞ ln(9 − x) dx ln(9 − x) + ln(x + 3) . 0. must f (x) > 0 for all real x? Explain. 1987 3. P (x. Also let A. 0) = G(x. 48T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. 0. N (x.0 . z)) with the following properties: (i) M. the real-valued function y = f (x) satisﬁes y − 2y + y = 2ex . 5. Find |C − A|. B. (a) If f (x) > 0 for all real x. z. y. 0) = 4. N. 55 4. (ii) Curl F = 0 for all (x. P (0. Let P be a polynomial. For which positive real numbers x does the series xa(n) 3 n=1 n converge? 7. y). For all real x. 6. uz) = u2 F (y − x. and such that P (1. z) = (M (x. and P (0. y.2. x2 + 4y 2 x + 4y 2 Prove or disprove that there is a vector-valued function F (x. y. y. 0. 0).3. C) = 0 and |B − A| = 10. u. y. y. 1. z) = (0. uy. (iii) F (x. must f (x) > 0 for all real x? Explain. B. . (b) If f (x) > 0 for all real x. let a(n) be the number of zeroes in the base 3 representation of n. z) = (0. with real coeﬃcients. For each positive integer n. 0). 0) = 5. z). 2 . P have continuous partial derivatives for all (x. 0. z − x) for all real x. Let G(x.

For each of limn→∞ xn and limn→∞ yn . w2 . r2n . Let r. exactly one of a and −a is in S. rn 2. r1 . . 0 ≤ s and r + s ≤ t. . 0). Let R be the region consisting of the points (x. 0) and (x. . . then at least one of the zi is not real. wn such that w1 .8. 3. 11. Suppose S is a set of (p2 − 1)/2 distinct nonzero elements of F with the property that for each a = 0 in F . . . z2 .4 49th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. . . z2n )M = On . Let (x1 . 0. . 2. . · · · . y) = (1. y) of the cartesian plane satisfying both |x| − |y| ≤ 1 and |y| ≤ 1. . . . re(C) is the matrix whose entries are the real parts of the entries of C. 10. wn (Note: if C is a matrix of complex numbers. not all zero. . Prove that s 0 t r + s 1 t r+1 +···+ s s t r+s = t+1 (t + 1 − s) t−s r 9. Prove that for arbitrary real numbers r1 . r2 + 1 r2 + 1 where r runs through the elements of F such that r 2 = −1. . 1988 1. Show that the set of solutions to the equation x2 + y 2 = 1 with x and y in F is given by (x.) 12. r2 . = re . Let N be the number of elements in the intersection S ∩ {2a : a ∈ S}. prove that the limit exists and ﬁnd it or prove that the limit does not exist. Sketch the region R and ﬁnd its area. Let F be the ﬁeld of p2 elements. with complex zi . WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 8. Let On be the n-dimensional vector (0. . Prove that N is even. y) = r 2 − 1 2r . . . Let M be a 2n × n matrix of complex numbers such that whenever (z1 . .6) and let xn+1 = xn cos yn − yn sin yn and yn+1 = xn sin yn + yn cos yn for n = 1. 0. M . s and t be integers with 0 ≤ r. there are complex numbers w1 .. where p is an odd prime. Let F be a ﬁeld in which 1 + 1 = 0. y1 ) = (0.56 CHAPTER 2.

Find. Show that every composite is expressible as xy + xz + yz + 1. b) and a nonzero function g deﬁned on (a. 9. the set of real numbers x for which ∞ n=1 1 1 csc − 1 n n x converges. . do there necessarily exist two points of the same color exactly one inch apart? (b) What if three is replaced by nine? 5. 4. . 49T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. For every n in the set N = {1. with proof. . Determine.2.} of positive integers. b) such that this wrong product rule is true for x in (a. then so is n=1 ∞ n/(n+1) . 10. 2. the smallest positive real number g with rn ≤ g for all n ∈ N. with proof. . y. 1988 57 2. Prove or disprove: If x and y are real numbers with y ≥ 0 and y(y + 1) ≤ (x + 1)2 . Prove that there exists a unique function f from the set R+ of positive real numbers to R+ such that f (f (x)) = 6x − f (x) and f (x) > 0 for all x > 0. n=1 (an ) . . 8. . b).4. 3. A composite (positive integer) is a product ab with a and b not necessarily distinct integers in {2. with proof. determine. z positive integers. then y(y − 1) ≤ x2 . 3. 4. (a) If every point of the plane is painted one of three colors. with x. does it follow that A is a scalar multiple of the identity? Prove your answer. A not uncommon calculus mistake is to believe that the product rule for derivatives 2 says that (f g) = f g .}. whether there exists an open interval (a. Prove that if ∞ an is a convergent series of positive real numbers. If a linear transformation A on an n-dimensional vector space has n + 1 eigenvectors such that any n of them are linearly independent. let rn be the minimum value √ of |c − d 3| for all nonnegative integers c and d with c + d = n. 7. If f (x) = ex . 6.

beginning and ending with 1? 2.) One may note that 0 −1 1 M1 = 1 0 −1 −1 1 0 M2 = 0 −1 −1 1 1 1 0 −1 −1 1 1 1 0 −1 −1 −1 1 1 0 −1 −1 −1 1 1 0 12. 1.58 CHAPTER 2. 1989 1. b) of integers such that for every positive integer t.}) 2. (Here z is a complex number and i2 = −1. let Mn be the 2n + 1 by 2n + 1 skew-symmetric matrix for which each entry in the ﬁrst n subdiagonals below the main diagonal is 1 and each of the remaining entries below the main diagonal is -1. For positive integers n. . the number at + b is a triangular number if and only if t is a triangular number. (According to one deﬁnition. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 11. then |z| = 1. . the rank of a matrix is the largest k such that there is a k × k submatrix with nonzero determinant. How many primes among the positive integers. 0 < α < 1. 2. is there a ﬁnite game with an honest coin such that the probability of one player winning the game is α? (An honest coin is one for which the probability of heads and the probability of tails are both 1 .) 4.5 50th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. A game is 2 ﬁnite if with probability 1 it must end in a ﬁnite number of moves. with proof. written as usual in base 10. If α is an irrational number.a2 y 2 } dy dx where a and b are positive. 3. (The triangular numbers are the tn = n(n + 1)/2 with n in {0. Find.) . Prove that there exist an inﬁnite number of ordered pairs (a. the rank of Mn . Evaluate a 0 0 b emax{b 2 x2 . . are alternating 1’s and 0’s. Prove that if 11z 10 + 10iz 9 + 10iz − 11 = 0.

Assuming that any two parts of the target of equal area are equally likely to be hit. and yx = zx implies y = z). Express your answer in the form d where a. a) Express µn in terms of µ0 . A dart. 0 (For example. d are integers. 50T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. thrown at random. Let S be a non-empty set with an associative operation that is left and right cancellative (xy = xz implies y = z. Let m be a positive integer and let G be a regular (2m + 1)-gon inscribed in the unit circle. 2. Let 1 an = if every block of zeros in the binary expansion of n has an even number of zeros in the block otherwise. m m Here |s − t| denotes the distance between the points s and t. diﬀerentiable and satisfying f (x) = −3f (x) + 6f (2x) for x > 0. 1989 59 5. n . is nearer to the center than to any edge. 6. b) Prove that the sequence {µn 3 } always converges. Must S be a group? 9. .2. For any points p inside G there are two distinct vertices v1 and v2 of G such that 1 A | |p − v1 | − |p − v2 | | < − 3. a36 = 1 because 36 = 1001002 and a20 = 0 because 20 = 101002 . deﬁne µn = ∞ 0 √ xn f (x) dx (sometimes called the nth moment of f ).} is inite. ∞). c. with the following property. Let f be a function on [0.ssume that for every a in S the set {an : n = 1. independent of m. hits a square target. For n a non-negative integer. 3. 8. ﬁnd the probability that the point hit √ a b+c .) Prove that α3 + xα + 1 = 0. Let α = 1 + a1 x + a2 x2 + · · · be a formal power series with coeﬃcients in the ﬁeld of two elements. . . b. Assume that |f (x)| ≤ e− x for x ≥ 0 (so that f (x) tends rapidly to 0 as x increases). and that the limit is 0 only n! if µ0 = 0. 7. Show that there is a positive constant A.5.

. 2. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 10. . Tn = (n + 4)Tn−1 − 4nTn−2 + (4n − 8)Tn−3 . 1. . 2. √ √ √ 2. CD. 12. s2 . D so that AB is parallel to CD and A.6 51th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. C. and OE. T1 = 3. . Is 2 the limit of a sequence of numbers of the form 3 n − 3 m (n. Prove that any convex pentagon whose vertices (no three of which are collinear) have 5 integer coordinates must have area greater than or equal to 2 . 40. 1] with f (1) = 0. 2. with proof. and O is the center of the circle. 1. and for n ≥ 3.60 CHAPTER 2. C. B. Show that the expected value of the Riemann sum n i=0 (xi+1 − xi )f (xi+1 ) is 01 f (t)P (t) dt. Let The ﬁrst few terms are Find. 5168. 1990 T0 = 2. where {An } and {Bn } are well-known sequences. 40576. . Determine the least upper bound of s1 −s2 over all such T d for which d = 0. 3. 14. 784. D are in counterclockwise order. B. m = 0. Label the vertices of a trapezoid T (quadrilateral with two parallel sides) inscribed in the unit circle as A. and d denote the lengths of the line segments AB. independent of f .)? 3. . if any. where P is a polynomial of degree n. Let f be a continuous function on [0. where E is the point of intersection of the diagonals of T . and describe allases. . Set x0 = 0 and xn+1 = 1. xn ) be a point chosen at random from the n-dimensional region deﬁned by 0 < x1 < x2 < · · · < xn < 1. T2 = 6. Let (x1 . x2 . 152. a formula for Tn of the form Tn = An + Bn . in which it is attained. Can a countably inﬁnite set have an uncountable collection of non-empty subsets such that the intersection of any two of them is ﬁnite? 11. with 0 ≤ P (t) ≤ 1 for 0 ≤ t ≤ 1. Let s1 . 6.

(Interpret g2n+1 as g1 . If X is a ﬁnite set. a2 . . g3 . . . then it has two elements that commute. 2n. . . Call an ordered pair (S. removes from the plane precisely those points whose distance from the center is irrational. 1+ where Pj is ∞ (1 + xj )Pj = 0. 10. g2 . If A and B are square matrices of the same size such that ABAB = 0. Prove that for |x| < 1. g2n such that (1) every element of G occurs exactly twice. . Show that if S has more than 50387 (= 154 − 152 − 15 + 2) elements. Prove or disprove: there is a sequence g1 . |z| > 1. 51T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. and (2) gi+1 equals gi a or gi b for i = 1. . and t > |S| for each t ∈ T . How many admissible ordered pairs of subsets of {1. T ) of subsets of {1. . Let G be a ﬁnite group of order n generated by a and b.6. of nonzero real numbers such that for n = 1. 2. Find all real-valued continuously diﬀerentiable functions f on the real line such that for all x. a1 . 3. . . 1990 61 4. 10} are there? Prove your answer. n} admissible if s > |T | for each s ∈ S. 2. . .2. . Let S be a set of 2 × 2 integer matrices whose entries aij (1) are all squares of integers and. . let X denote the number of elements in X. 0 8.) 11. (z − x)(z − x2 )(z − x3 ) · · · (z − xj ) 9. . Is there an inﬁnite sequence a0 . . . x (f (x))2 = [(f (t))2 + (f (t))2 ] dt + 1990. Consider a paper punch that can be centered at any point of the plane and that. . 2. . 7. 2. . (2) satisfy aij ≤ 200. when operated. . does it follow that BABA = 0? 6. the polynomial pn (x) = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + · · · + an xn has exactly n distinct real roots? . How many punches are needed to remove every point? 5. . j=1 (1 − z)(1 − zx)(1 − zx2 ) · · · (1 − zxj−1 ) .

. 3). . If A3 = B 3 and A2 B = B 2 A. n − 1. 2. t) = ∅ for all S? (K runs over all lines in the plane. such that (a) the ci have no limit point in the ﬁnite plane. . Let K be a line and t a positive number. Let S be a nonempty closed bounded convex set in the plane. t) be the band of points whose distance from L is at most (t/2)w. 0). 2. (The side originally on the x-axis is now back on the x-axis. . then 90◦ clockwise about the point (7. 90◦ clockwise about the point (10. with centers c1 . 1991 1.1). 4. . . A 2 × 3 rectangle has vertices as (0. respectively. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 12. Let L1 and L2 be support lines for S parallel to K1 . 0). 0). What is the smallest t such that S∩ K BS (K. D3 . . .) Find the area of the region above the x-axis and below the curve traced out by the point whose initial position is (1. 0). can A2 + B 2 be nvertible? 3. and ﬁnally. ..) 2. It then otates 90◦ clockwise about the point (5. (b) p ri +ri+1 2 i = 1.7 52th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. 0). and =0 i = 1. 3). (b) the sum of the areas of the Di is ﬁnite. Does there exist an inﬁnite sequence of closed discs D1 . (0. . c3 . Let BS (K. and (2.62 CHAPTER 2. where p (x) denotes the derivative of p(x). . and let L be the line parallel to K and midway between L1 and L2 . D2 . 2. in the plane. n. It rotates 90 ◦ clockwise about the point (2. Find all real polynomials p(x) of degree n ≥ 2 for which there exist real numbers r1 < r2 < · · · < rn such that (a) p(ri ) = 0. . . and (c) every line in the plane intersects at least one of the Di ? . . Let A and B be diﬀerent n×n matrices with real entries. 0). where w is the distance between L1 and L2 . (2. c2 .

Prove that A(n) = B(n) for each n ≥ 1. . 1991 5. ∞). 2. ar−1 > ar Let B(n) denote the number of b1 + b2 + · · · + bs which add up to n. 2. 4. 6. prove that (f (x))2 + (g(x))2 = 1 for all x. 9. and B(7) = 5 because the relevant sums are 4 + 2 + 1. . gk } appears at least once as a bi .7. a2 > a 3 + a 4 . and (c) if b1 = gk then every element in {1. if m and n are integers greater than L. Does there exist a real number L such that. g(x + y) = f (x)g(y) + g(x)f (y). 4. suppose that for each pair of real numbers x and y. . Deﬁne a sequence (ak )∞ by a0 = A and ak+1 = ak + S(ak ) for k ≥ 0. 4 + 2 + 1. f (x + y) = f (x)f (y) − g(x)g(y). with (b) each bi is in the sequence 1. Find the maximum value of y 0 63 x4 + (y − y 2 )2 dx for 0 ≤ y ≤ 1. let S(n) = n − m2 . . (For example. 2 + 2 + 1 + 1 + 1.2. 4 + 3. real-valued functions deﬁned on (−∞. Furthermore. 2 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1. diﬀerentiable. 2 + 2 + 2 + 1. deﬁned by g1 = 1. ≥ bs . any two of which intersect at most along their boundaries? . . and gj = gj−1 + gj−2 + 1. . . . where m is the greatest integer with m2 ≤ n. For each integer n ≥ 0. Let A(n) denote the number of sums of positive integers a1 + a 2 + · · · + a r which add up to n with a1 > a 2 + a 3 . . . A(7) = 5 because the relevant sums are 7. If f (0) = 0.) (a) b1 ≥ b2 ≥ . . . . then an m × n rectangle may be expressed as a nion of 4 × 6 and 5 × 7 rectangles. Suppose f and g are non-constant. For k=0 what positive integers A is this sequence eventually constant? 8. gj . . 6 + 1. . 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1. . 52T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. g2 = 2. 7. ar−2 > ar−1 + ar . 5 + 2.

Prove that p j=0 p j p+j ≡ 2p + 1 (mod p2 ). y) of positive integers. . j 11. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 10. 1992 1. Deﬁne C(α) to be the coeﬃcient of x1992 in the power series about x = 0 of (1 + x)α . such that sinh u(1 − x) sinh ux +b ax b1−x ≤ a sinh u sinh u for all u with 0 < |u| ≤ c and for all x. (Note: sinh u = (eu − e−u )/2. which satisfy (x2 + y 2 )m = (xy)n . (ii) f (f (n + 2) + 2) = n for all integers n. ﬁnd all triples (n. 0 k=1 y + k 3. Suppose p is an odd prime. with n relatively prime to m. Let a and b be positive numbers. For a given positive integer m. How many elements are in the set {x2 : x ∈ Zp } ∩ {y 2 + 1 : y ∈ Zp }? 12. Find the largest number c.8 53th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition.64 CHAPTER 2. 0 < x < 1. (i) f (f (n)) = n. 2. x. Evaluate 1992 1 1 C(−y − 1) dy. (iii) f (0) = 1. Let p be an odd prime and let Zp denote (the ﬁeld of) integers modulo p.) 2. in terms of a and b. for all integers n. Prove that f (n) = 1 − n is the only integer-valued function deﬁned on the integers that satisﬁes the following conditions.

.) 7. 3.. for n ≥ 0. an+1 (x. 53T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. 2. let an = 0 (or 1) if the number of 1’s in the binary representation of n is even (or odd). Four points are chosen at random on the surface of a sphere. (Reminder: For integers a and b with = a! b!(a−b)! for 0 ≤ b ≤ a. What is the probability that the center of the sphere lies inside the tetrahedron whose vertices are at the four points? (It is understood that each point is independently chosen relative to a uniform distribution on the sphere. . If 1 n2 . for 0 ≤ j ≤ m − 1. k) = j=0 n j n .2. y) = 2 Find the area of the region {(x. k) to be the coeﬃcient of xk in the expansion of (1 + x + x2 + x3 )n . Let AS be the set of numbers that occur as averages of two distinct elements of S. . respectively.) 9. f = 2 n n +1 compute the values of the derivatives f (k) (0). y) = x. k = 1. what is the smallest possible number of elements in AS ? 8. 6. . y)|(an (x. y))2 + y 2 . (an (x. a b a b is the standard binomial coeﬃcient. 2. a sequence (an (x. k − 2j where a ≥ 0. deﬁne Q(n. For nonnegative integers n and k. . y))n≥0 converges}. with a b = 0 otherwise. Prove that k Q(n. 5. Let f be an inﬁnitely diﬀerentiable real-valued function deﬁned on the real numbers. Let S be a set of n distinct real numbers. For a given n ≥ 2. .8. . n = 1. For each positive integer n. 3. y))n≥0 is deﬁned as follows: a0 (x. . 1992 65 4. For any pair (x. y) of real numbers. Show that there do not exist positive integers k and m such that ak+j = ak+m+j = ak+m+2j .

then either AB = BA or AB = −BA.] 2 2. 1 4 1 1 . . where I is the n × n identity matrix. 1 1 1 1 . . 1 1 5 1 . (iv) if A ∈ M and A = I. 1 1 1 1 ··· n+1 Is the set Dn n! . . The ﬁrst region is bounded by the y-axis. Let d1992 dx1992 p(x) x3 − x = f (x) g(x) for polynomials f (x) and g(x). Find c so that the areas of the two shaded regions are equal. 2. the line y = c and the curve.. . . there is at least one B ∈ M such that AB = −BA.9 54th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. bounded? 12. Let p(x) be a nonzero polynomial of degree less than 1992 having no nonconstant factor in common with x3 − x. . Find the smallest possible degree of f (x). The horizontal line y = c intersects the curve y = 2x − 3x3 in the ﬁrst quadrant as in the ﬁgure. ··· ··· ··· ··· .66 CHAPTER 2. 1993 1. . . . Let (xn )n≥0 be a sequence of nonzero real numbers such that xn − xn−1 xn+1 = 1 for n = 1. 2. the other lies under the curve and above the line y = c between their two points of intersection. . 11. then either AB ∈ M or −AB ∈ M. but not both. (iii) if A ∈ M and B ∈ M. . 3. 1 1 1 6 . Let M be a set of real n × n matrices such that (ii) if A ∈ M and B ∈ M.. Let Dn denote the value of the (n − 1) × (n − 1) determinant n≥2 3 1 1 1 . . (i) I ∈ M. [Figure not included. Prove that M contains at most n2 matrices. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 10. . Prove there exists a real number a such that xn+1 = axn − xn−1 for all n ≥ 1. . .

) 7. 3. as the property that. 3. 3. 2. m) be the number of functions f : Pn → {1. . Prove that m c(n. . 3. Let y1 . 3. . 3. m) = j=1 j n. 2. . Let c(n. The last person to discard wins the game.1) with respect to the uniform distribution. for ny n. The deck is randomly shuﬄed and n cards are dealt to each of two players. 2. Beginning with A. the nth term of the sequence is 2 if and only if n = 1 + rm for some nonnegative integer m. The inﬁnite sequence of 2’s and 3’s 2. m} such that f (A ∩ B) = min{f (A). Find the smallest positive integer n such that for every integer m with 0 < m < 1993. 2. f (B)}. Assuming optimal strategy by both A and B. The game ends as soon as the sum of the numbers on the discarded cards is divisible by 2n + 1. y93 be positive integers each of which is less than or equal to 19. 4. 3. 2. where r and s are rational numbers. 1993 n 1994 8. . (Note: xrf loor denotes the largest integer less than or equal to x. if one forms a second sequence that records the number of 3’s between successive 2’s. . Let Pn be the set of subsets of {1. . . x19 be positive integers each of which is less than or equal to 93. . 3. 2. 3. 3. . y2 . 6. 3. Two real numbers x and y are chosen at random in the interval (0. there exists an integer k for which m k m+1 < < . What is the probability that he closest integer to x/y is even? Express the answer in the form r + sπ. 2. 3. 2. 5. 3. . 3. . Consider the following game played with a deck of 2n cards numbered from 1 to 2n. 54T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. 2.9. . . 3. 2. the result is identical to the iven sequence. . 1993 67 3. n}. . Prove that there exists a (nonempty) sum of some xi ’s equal to a sum of some yj ’s. 3. 3. 3. Show that −10 −100 x2 − x x3 − 3x + 1 2 dx + 1 11 1 101 x2 − x x3 − 3x + 1 2 dx + 11 10 101 100 x2 − x x3 − 3x + 1 2 dx is a rational number. .2. . 2. 3. . 3. the players take turns discarding one of their remaining cards and announcing its number. 3. 3. 3. Show that there exists a real number r such that. Let x1 . x2 . . 3. what is the probability that A wins? 9.

n=1 2. and the line y = mx. . for all n. Find the positive value of m such that the area in the ﬁrst quadrant enclosed by the 2 ellipse x + y 2 = 1. 0 ≤ y ≤ 1. 1 0 f (y)K(x. not necessarily distinct. 9 3. where x < y and replace them with 2x and y − x. A + B. Prove that the same must be true of A + 5B. 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. y) dy = g(x) and 0 1 g(y)K(x. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 10. . y) is positive and continuous for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. 11. . . positive integers.68 CHAPTER 2. and the functions f (x) and g(x) are positive and continuous for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. A + 4B has an inverse with integer entries. the y-axis. Suppose that for all x. + ri1994 for positive integers i1 < i2 < . y) dy = f (x). the x-axis. A + 3B. Let S be the set of all numbers expressible in the form ri1 + . < i1994 . The function K(x. d) whose intersection with S is empty. 4. Let A and B be 2 × 2 matrices with integer entries such that each of A. 5. Show that one can transform S into a set containing 0 by a ﬁnite number of applications of the following rule: Select two of the three integers. Prove that every interval (a. 1994 1. A + 2B. Prove that the points of an isosceles triangle of side length 1 annot be colored in four √ colors such that no two points at distance at least 2 − 2 from each other receive the same color. Let (an ) be a sequence of positive reals such that. Let S be a set of three. an ≤ a2n + a2n+1 . 12. Let (rn ) be a sequence of positive reals with limit 0. Show that f (x) = g(x) for 9 ≤ x ≤ 1. 2. b) contains a subinterval (c. Prove that ∞ an diverges. and the line y = 2x/3 is equal to the area in the ﬁrst 9 2 quadrant enclosed by the ellipse x + y 2 = 1. say x and y.10 55th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. . Show there do not exist four points in the Euclidean plane such that the pairwise distances between the points are all odd integers.

f 1 = f and f k+1 = f ◦ f k ). . Let f1 . . Let A be the matrix 3 2 and for positive integers n. there exists a sequence i1 . Find all c such that the graph of the function x4 + 9x3 + cx2 + ax + b meets some line in four distinct points. b. where I = ((10)(01)). n. k Prove there exists α such that fαk (n2 ) = fα (n2 ) = n2 − k for k = 1. . 8. Fix n a positive integer. let ni = 101i + 1002i . . 12. ◦ f10 maps A to A. .11. then a = c and b = d. . . For any integer i. . For what k must there exist N such that f (x) > ekx for x > N ? 10. there exist at most 512 sequences (e1 . For what pairs (a. .e.2. Given that the product of any three (not necessarily distinct) elements of T is in T and that the product of any three elements of U is in U . . if a and b are in S. . . ◦ fik (0) = n. b) of positive real numbers does the improper integral ∞ b √ √ x+a− x− √ √ x − x − b dx . 0 ≤ c ≤ d ≤ 99. deﬁne dn as the greatest 4 2 common divisor of the entries of An − I. 9. . f10 be bijections of the integers such that for every integer n. c. ik for some k such that fi1 ◦ . Suppose a. Let f (x) be a positive-valued function over the reals such that f (x) > f (x) for all x. . 2. deﬁne fα (i) as the greatest integer less than or equal to αi. 1995 1. Prove that if A is any nonempty ﬁnite set. Prove that dn → ∞ as n → ∞. . 56T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. . Show that if na + nb is congruent to nc + nd mod 10100. 2. Find all positive integers n such that |n − m2 | ≤ 250 for exactly 15 nonnegative integers m.) 7. . (Here f 1 = f and f 0 means the identity function. 11. show that at least one of the two subsets T.11 56th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. and write f k for the k-th iterate of f (i. d are integers with 0 ≤ a ≤ bleq99. e10 ) of zeroes and e e10 ones such that f1 1 ◦ . then so is ab). For α real. . Let S be a set of real numbers which is closed under multiplication (that is. . U is closed under multiplication. Let T and U be disjoint subsets of S whose union is S. 1995 69 6. .

. . 8. b. . . f9 is related to e1 e2 . Show that for some n ≥ 1995. . . 6. Are the functions x1 . 4.] . 2. . 7. 9} such that π(x) = π(y) and π (x) = π (y). . xn necessarily linearly dependent? 6. . then e6 may be 2 or 9. 3. dxn = an1 x1 + an2 x2 + · · · + ann xn dt for some constants aij > 0. d9 has nine (not necessarily distinct) decimal digits. 7. 4. 5. . if d1 d2 . c of the resulting matrix be rearranged (if necessary) so that a ≤ b ≤ c. The number f1 f2 . d9 by the corresponding digit ei (1 ≤ i ≤ 9) is divisible by 7. e9 is the same way: that is. 7. 2. Let the row sums a. xn be diﬀerentiable (real-valued) functions of a single variable f which satisfy dx1 = a11 x1 + a12 x2 + · · · + a1n xn dt dx2 = a21 x1 + a22 x2 + · · · + a2n xn dt . xi (t) → 0 as t → ∞. x2 . x2 . . Suppose we have a necklace of n beads. for each i. 6. di −fi is divisible by 7. 5. . . 3. . [For example. 2. The number e1 e2 . The number d1 d2 . Show that. . . Suppose that for all i. . .70 converge? CHAPTER 2. x2 . . with all orders equally likely and with the orders for diﬀerent columns independent of each other. . WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 3. Each bead is labeled with an integer and the sum of all these labels is n − 1. there are two distinct numbers x and y in {1. n. Suppose that each of n people writes down the numbers 1. . it is at least four times as likely that both b = a + 1 and c = a + 2 as that a = b = c. Prove that for any two partitions π and π . [A partition of a set S is a collection of disjoint subsets (parts) whose union is S. . . 5. . . Let x1 . since 199502996 and 199509996 are multiples of 7. . . 9}. . e9 is such that each of the nine 9-digit numbers formed by replacing just one of the digits di is d1 d2 . . Prove that we can cut the necklace to form a string whose consecutive labels x1 . let π(x) be the number of elements in the part containing x. d9 = 199501996.] 4. xn satisfy k i=1 xi ≤ k − 1 for k = 1. . .3 in random order in one column of a 3 × n matrix.2. . For a partition π of {1. . 8. each of the nine numbers formed by replacing one of the ei by the corresponding fi is divisible by 7.

5 and 6 beans. x is the greatest integer ≤ x.}. 1 7 the sum of all the determinants associated with n2 -digit integers. d 1 . (Leading digits are assumed to be nonzero. . whose semi-axes have lengths a and b. where a. A move consists of taking either a) one bean from a heap. 1 2207 − 2207−.. d are integers. b. You may assume that the sides of the squares are parallel to the sides of the rectangle. 3.2. . To each positive integer with n2 decimal digits. we associate the determinant of the matrix obtained by writing the digits in order across the rows. 57T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION.] 2. or b) a complete heap of two or three beans. . rolls without slipping on the curve y = c sin x . to the integer 8617 we associate det = 50. . as a function of n. [As usual. a rectangle of area A exists such that the two squares can be packed in the rectangle (without interior overlap). 1996 71 8. deﬁne S(α) = { nα : n = 1.4. Express your answer in the form 11. The two players move alternately.12 57th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. To win the game. c. 2. given that the ellipse completes one revolution a when it traverses one period of the curve? 9. For a positive real number α. Evaluate 8 2207 − √ a+b c . for example. b.) 10. Find. provided at least two beans are left behind in that heap. for n = 2.. S(β) and S(γ). How are a. 2. do you want to move ﬁrst or second? Give a winning strategy. Find the least number A such that for any two squares of combined area 1. An ellipse. For example. 3. there are 9000 determinants. . Prove that {1. 1996 1. . for 8 6 n = 2. c related. A game starts with four heaps of beans. The player who takes the last heap wins.12. 12. containing 3. .} cannot be expressed as the disjoint union of three sets S(α).

a) ∈ S. with proof. . b. . n} which are minimal selﬁsh sets. b. Prove that there exists a one-to-one function g from A to R such that g(a) < g(b) < g(c) implies (a. ﬁnd. Show that for every positive integer n. prove that the sum p p p + +···+ 1 2 k of binomial coeﬃcients is divisible by p2 . Let C1 and C2 be circles whose centers are 10 units apart. d) and (d. 7. n}. Deﬁne a selﬁsh set to be a set which has its own cardinality (number of elements) as an element. Suppose that (a) (a. c) ∈ S if and only if (c. selﬁsh sets none of whose proper subsets is selﬁsh. 3. / (c) (a. and whose radii are 1 and 3.72 CHAPTER 2. b. d. c) of distinct elements of a ﬁnite set A. Given that {x1 . Let c > 0 be a constant. Suppose that each of 20 students has made a choice of anywhere from 0 to 6 courses from a total of 6 courses oﬀered. If p is a prime number greater than 3 and k = 2p/3 . c. . xn } = {1. the number of subsets of {1. . . with proof. with proof. b. . . 5. of x1 x2 + x2 x3 + · · · + xn−1 xn + xn x1 . b. Prove or disprove: there are 5 students and 2 courses such that all 5 have chosen both courses or all 5 have chosen neither course. b. the locus of all points M for which there exists points X on C1 and Y on C2 such that M is the midpoint of the line segment XY . 4. as a function of n (with n ≥ 2). c) and (c. Find. (b) (a. a) are both in S if and only if (b. x2 . . 2. a. 2. c) ∈ S if and only if (b. Let S be the set of ordered triples (a. . Note: R is the set of real numbers. . WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 2. Note that R denotes the set of real numbers. . c. 6. 2n − 1 e 2n−1 2 2n + 1 < 1 · 3 · 5 · · · (2n − 1) < e 2n+1 2 . c) ∈ S. Give a complete description. . the largest possible value. with proof. 8. 9. b) are both in S. Find. a) ∈ S. . of the set of all continuous functions f : R → R such that f (x) = f (x2 + c) for all x ∈ R. that is.

b2 ). A triangle ABC has H as the intersection of the altitudes. For any square matrix A. A player who runs out of pennies drops out of the game and leaves the table. and F the foot of the altitude from A. players alternately passing one penny or two to the next player who still has some pennies.13 58th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. We call a string S balanced if every substring T of (consecutive symbols of) S has −2 ≤ ∆(T ) ≤ 2. 58T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. b1 ). the number of balanced strings of length n. bn ) be the vertices of a convex polygon which contains the origin in its interior. Find. we can deﬁne sin A by the usual power series: (−1)n sin A = A2n+1 . 22 2 · 4 2 ·4 ·6 . 3.2. 3. n are seated around a table. (an . ∞ 73 11. Player 1 passes a penny to player 2. b2 )xa2 y b2 + · · · + (an . A rectangle. HOM F . ∆(XOOXOOX) = −1. 2. Given a ﬁnite string S of symbols X and O. n=0 (2n + 1)! Prove or disprove: there exists a 2 × 2 matrix A with real entries such that sin A = 1 1996 0 1 . 12. who passes two pennies to Player 5.13. What is the length of BC? 2. who then passes two pennies to player 3. O the center of the circumscribed circle. XOOXOOX is not balanced. . (a2 . has sides HO = 11 and OM = 5. Let (a1 . Evaluate ∞ 0 x− x5 x7 x3 + − +··· 2 2·4 2·4·6 1+ x2 x4 x6 + 2 2 + 2 2 2 + · · · dx. For example. since it contains the substring OOXOO. Thus. and so on. 1997 10. 0) 2. . . . Find an inﬁnite set of numbers n for which some player ends up with all n pennies. b1 )xa1 y b1 + (a2 . . and each has a single penny. Prove that there exist positive real numbers x and y such that (a1 . . M the midpoint of BC. Players 1. with proof. 1997 1. Player 3 then passes one penny to Player 4. . we write ∆(S) for the number of X’s in S minus the number of O’s. . bn )xan y bn = (0.

. deﬁne xk recursively by x0 = 0. Find xk in terms of n and k. 6. Prove that for n ≥ 2.i ≤ 1. n terms 22 ···2 i=0 (−1)i ak−i. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 4. an ) such that 1/a1 + 1/a2 + . + 1/an = 1. Prove that for all [integers] k ≥ 0. n − 1 terms ≡ 22 ···2 (mod n). Prove that there exists an element a ∈ G such that ψ(x) = aφ(x) is a homomorphism (i.) 8. a2 . . y ∈ G). 1 ≤ k ≤ n. Determine all n such that 5 does not divide qn . Let f be a twice-diﬀerentiable real-valued function satisfying f (x) + f (x) = −xg(x)f (x). .74 CHAPTER 2. Let {x} denote the distance between the real number x and the nearest integer. where pn and m=1 qn are relatively prime positive integers. . For each positive integer n. b) denotes the minimum of a and b. For a positive integer n and any real number c. { }). Let Nn denote the number of ordered n-tuples of positive integers (a1 . Determine whether N10 is even or odd. 5. Prove that |f (x)| is bounded. x1 = 1. ψ(xy) = ψ(x)ψ(y) for all x. Let am. xk+2 = k+1 Fix n and then take c to be the largest value for which xn+1 = 0. 6n 3n (Here min(a. . . where g(x) ≥ 0 for all real x. 2k 3 0≤ 11. .e. and for k ≥ 0. 9. write the sum n 1/m in the form pn /qn . 10.n denote the coeﬃcient of xn in the expansion of (1 + x + x2 )m . For each positive integer n. cxk+1 − (n − k)xk . evaluate 6n−1 Fn = m=1 min({ m m }. Let G be a group with identity e and φ : G → G a function such that φ(g1 )φ(g2 )φ(g3 ) = φ(h1 )φ(h2 )φ(h3 ) whenever g1 g2 g3 = e = h1 h2 h3 . 7.

then 3D is the disc of radius 3r and center P . Determine all n such that 11 divides An . Find the least diameter of a dissection of this triangle into four parts. Dn in F such that E ⊆ ∪n 3Dj . of s. For n > 2. Let A be the area of the region lying below s and above the x-axis and let B be the area of the region lying to the right of the y-axis and to the left of s.) 2. . B. Let f be a real function on the real line with continuous third derivative. j=1 Here. A4 = A3 A2 = 101. . 5. C are three vertices of a square. . Here |XY | is the length of segment XY and [ABC] is the area of triangle ABC. Let A1 = 0 and A2 = 1. if D is the disc of radius r and center P . Let F be a ﬁnite collection of open discs in R2 whose union contains a set E ⊆ R2 . The dissection of the 3–4–5 triangle shown below (into four congruent right triangles similar to the original) has diameter 5/2. 1998 75 12.14 59th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. For example A3 = A2 A1 = 10. and not on the position. A5 = A4 A3 = 10110. Let s be any arc of the unit circle lying entirely in the ﬁrst quadrant. Prove that if (|AB| + |BC|)2 < 8 · [ABC] + 1 then A. Show that there is a pairwise disjoint subcollection D1 .2. Prove that there exists a point a such that f (a) · f (a) · f (a) · f (a) ≥ 0. A cube is inscribed in the cone so that one face of the cube is contained in the base of the cone. . Prove that A + B depends only on the arc length. (The diameter of a dissection is the least upper bound of the distances between pairs of points belonging to the same part. A right circular cone has base of radius 1 and height 3. 59T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. Let A. 3. B. . the number An is deﬁned by concatenating the decimal expansions of An−1 and An−2 from left to right. 6. What is the side-length of the cube? 2.14. and so forth. 4. C denote distinct points with integer coordinates in R2 . 1998 1.

−1 if x < −1 3x + 2 if −1 ≤ x ≤ 0 |f (x)| − |g(x)| + h(x) = −2x + 2 if x > 0. let H be the unit hemisphere {(x. such that for all x. α.g(x). 1999 1. Find necessary and suﬃcient conditions on positive integers m and n so that mn−1 (−1) i=0 i/m + i/n = 0. c. N = 1111 · · · 11. all of them 1. Find the thousandth digit after the decimal point of √ N. b. √ n3 + an2 + bn + c 12. y. and one on the line y = x. y. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 7. for any integers a. . and write your answer in the form A sin α + B cos β. one on the x-axis. 9. B. determine the minimum perimeter of a triangle with one vertex at (a. z) : x2 + y 2 + z 2 = 1. that is. 10. 8. Prove that.15 60th Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. and h(x). there exists a positive integer n such that is not an integer. if they exist. Determine the surface area of that portion of H lying over the planar region inside P . C the unit circle {(x. z ≥ 0}. 0) : x2 + y 2 = 1}. and P the regular pentagon inscribed in C. Find polynomials f (x). where A. b) with 0 < b < a. Given a point (a. You may assume that a triangle of minimum perimeter exists. 11. β are real numbers. 2.76 CHAPTER 2. b). Find the minimum value of (x + 1/x)6 − (x6 + 1/x6 ) − 2 (x + 1/x)3 + (x3 + 1/x3 ) for x > 0. Let N be the positive integer with 1998 decimal digits.

let S(x. for each integer n ≥ 0. Sum the series m2 n . Evaluate limθ→0 |EF |. Prove that there is a constant C such that. Let A = {(x. 8. an−2 an−3 Show that. an = 6a2 an−3 − 8an−1 a2 n−1 n−2 . 1 − 2x − x2 n=0 Prove that. −1 6. an is an integer multiple of n. . Prove that for some k. Let p(x) be a polynomial that is nonnegative for all real x. y) = 1 ≤ m ≤2 2 n xm y n . the point D is chosen on AB so that |AC| = |AD| = 1. there is an integer m such that a2 + a 2 = a m . if p(x) is a polynomial of degree 1999. then 1 |p(0)| ≤ C |p(x)| dx. . Consider the power series expansion ∞ 1 = a n xn . 7. Let P (x) be a polynomial of degree n such that P (x) = Q(x)P (x).2. Show that if P (x) has at least two distinct roots then it must have n distinct roots. y) : 0 ≤ x.15. . where Q(x) is a quadratic polynomial and P (x) is the second derivative of P (x). y < 1}. Right triangle ABC has right angle at C and ∠BAC = θ. The perpendicular to BC at E meets AB at F . The sequence (an )n≥1 is deﬁned by a1 = 1. For (x. . a3 = 24. there are polynomials f1 (x). y) ∈ A. 9. 3. 60T H ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. n n+1 4. for n ≥ 4. m m n m=1 n=1 3 (n3 + m3 ) ∞ ∞ 5. for all n. 1999 77 2. the point E is chosen on BC so that ∠CDE = θ. and. a2 = 2. . fk (x) such that k p(x) = j=1 (fj (x))2 .

For an integer n ≥ 3. t ∈ S such that gcd(s. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION where the sum ranges over all pairs (m. Show that f (x) < 2f (x) for all x. Suppose that f (x) ≤ f (x) for all x. k. Show that there exist s. 12.y)∈A lim (1 − xy 2 )(1 − x2 y)S(x. 11. let θ = 2π/n. f (x). Let f be a real function with a continuous third derivative such that f (x). where I is the n×n identity matrix and A = (ajk ) has entries ajk = cos(jθ+kθ) for all j. . each greater than 1. Suppose that for each integer n there is some s ∈ S such that gcd(s. 10.1). f (x).78 CHAPTER 2. n) = 1 or gcd(s. t) is prime. y). f (x) are positive for all x. Evaluate (x. n) of positive integers satisfying the indicated inequalities. Let S be a ﬁnite set of integers.(x. n) = s. Evaluate the determinant of the n × n matrix I +A.y)→(1.

Let aj .] 3. Show that the improper integral B→∞ 0 lim B sin(x) sin(x2 ) dx converges. Prove that if there exists a positive integer m for which am = 0 then either a1 = 0 or a2 = 0. 1 ≤ j ≤ N . . n + 2 are each the sum of the squares of two integers. bj . n + 1. 8. ﬁnd the maximum possible area of the octagon. Deﬁne a sequence a0 . a1 . with the vertices around the circumference in the given order. Let Nk j=1 kf denote the number of zeroes (including multiplicities) of d k . x1 .2. bj . Prove that dt N0 ≤ N1 ≤ N2 ≤ · · · and lim Nk = 2N. given that j 2. Show that there exist integers r. Prove that the expression gcd(m. cj be integers for 1 ≤ j ≤ N . . The octagon P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 is inscribed in a circle. Show that two of these points are separated by a distance of at least r 1/3 . 1) should be counted. 5. What are the possible values of x0 . and the polygon P2 P4 P6 P8 is aectangle of area 4. 61ST ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. where each aj is real and aN is not equal to 0. Let f (t) = N aj sin(2πjt). 4. 2000 ∞ j=0 1. s.16 61st Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. Three distinct points with integer coordinates lie in the plane on a circle of radius r > 0. Prove that there exist inﬁnitely many integers n such that n. 2000 79 2.] . 9. k→∞ [Editorial clariﬁcation: only zeroes in [0. t such that raj + sbj + tcj is odd for at least 4N/7 values of j. . cj is odd. n) n n m is an integer for all pairs of integers n ≥ m ≥ 1. of integers such that a0 = 0 and an+1 = f (an ) for all n ≥ 0. 2 = 12 + 12 . . . 1 = 02 + 12 . Let A be a positive real number. Given that the polygon P1 P3 P5 P7 is a square of area 5. at least one of aj .16. [Example: 0 = 02 + 02 . are positive numbers for which ∞ xj = A? j=0 x2 . Assume for each j. 7. . Let f (x) be a polynomial with integer coeﬃcients. 6.

Write the numbers 1. Prove that there are unique positive integers a. Consider a set S and a binary operation ∗. AB such that AE bisects BF at point R. 6. For each k. . . 2. . consider the polynomial Pm (x) = x4 − (2m + 4)x2 + (m − 2)2 . G lie. Show that there are three distinct points in B which are the vertices of an equilateral triangle. 3. Points E. S2 . i. (k − 1)n + n. If the n coins are tossed. . Can an arc of a parabola inside a circle of radius 1 have a length greater than 4? 7. You have coins C1 . ±1) in n-dimensional space with n ≥ 3. . Show that there exist inﬁnitely many integers N for which SN = S0 ∪ {N + a : a ∈ S0 }. respectively. 12. ±1. for each a. is (k − 1)n + 1. . We deﬁne ﬁnite sets S1 . (k − 1)n + 2. when tossed. . F. what is the probability that the number of heads is odd? Express the answer as a rational function of n. .e. BF bisects CG at point S. Triangle ABC has an area 1. . . Find the area of the triangle RST . 2001 1. 11. Let S0 be a ﬁnite set of positive integers. b ∈ S. Show that f (x) = 0 for −1 ≤ x ≤ 1. Let B be a set of more than 2 n distinct points with coordinates of the form (±1. 5. 2. For each integer m. of positive integers as follows: the integer a is in Sn+1 if and only if exactly one of a − 1 or a is in Sn . from left to right. it has probability 1/(2k+1) of falling heads.80 CHAPTER 2. . b ∈ S. . b ∈ S. . a ∗ b ∈ S. n+1 2. Assume (a ∗ b) ∗ a = b for all a. n such that an+1 − (a + 1)n = 2001. Prove that a ∗ (b ∗ a) = b for all a. n2 in the squares of an n × n grid so that the k-th row. Let n be an even positive integer. .17 62nd Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition. Cn . .. C2 . and CG bisects AE at point T . . For what values of m is Pm (x) the product of two non-constant polynomials with integer coeﬃcients? 4. Let f (x) be a continuous function such that f (2x2 − 1) = 2xf (x) for all x. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 10. Ck is biased so that. . . . . on sides BC. CA.

2002 1 xk −1 1. 12. Evaluate 9. y) satisfying the system of equations 1 x 1 x + − 1 2y 1 2y = (x2 + 3y 2 )(3x2 + y 2 ) = 2(y 4 − x4 ). 1/2). . . The n-th derivative of where Pn (x) is a polynomial. has the form Pn (x) (xk −1)n+1 2. 2. Given any ﬁve points on a sphere. √ n. For any positive integer n. Find Pn (1). and let g be a continuous realvalued function such that g(g(x)) = ag(x) + bx for all real x. where f (n) denotes f composed with itself n times. 11. Find all pairs of real numbers (x. 0. the sum of the numbers on the red squares is equal to the sum of the numbers on the black squares. . Let k be a ﬁxed positive integer. Must there exist inﬁnitely many positive integers n such that an−i + an+i < 2an for i = 1. let n denote the closest integer to 2 n + 2− n . 1}. . 8. Prove that g(x) = cx for some constant c. n − 1? 2. Let a and b be real numbers in the interval (0. Assume that (an )n≥1 is an increasing sequence of positive real numbers such that lim an /n = 0. 63RD ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. Deﬁne f : S → S by f (x) = x − 1/x. Prove that for each coloring.18. 2n n=1 ∞ 10. Prove or disprove that ∞ n=1 f (n) (S) = ∅. Let S denote the set of rational numbers diﬀerent from {−1.18 63rd Anual William Lowell Putnam Competition.2. . 2002 81 Color the squares of the grid so that half of the squares in each row and in each column are red and the other half are black (a checkerboard coloring is one possibility). show that some four of them must lie on a closed hemisphere.

The winner is the player who ﬁrst succeeds in signing three faces that share a common vertex. For which values of b does 1 n=1 f (n) converge? 7. Let f (1) = 1. . and play continues in turn until the 3 × 3 matrix is completed with ﬁve 1’s and four 0’s. 2. 4. Prove that every positive rational number appears in the set an−1 :n≥1 = an 1 1 2 1 3 . . Shanille O’Keal shoots free throws on a basketball court. deﬁne f (n) = nf (d). . who will win and how? 5. Prove that Tn −n is always even. ne . f (2) = 2. .. 1 1 1 < − 1− 2ne e n n ∞ < 1 . together with the rules a2n+1 = an and a2n+2 = an +an+1 for each integer n ≥ 0. where d is the number of base-b digits of n. in turn. She hits the ﬁrst and misses the second. 3. signs his or her name on a previously unsigned face. What is the probability she hits exactly 50 of her ﬁrst 100 shots? 8. Player 0 counters with a 0 in a vacant position. Two players play the following game: Each player. Assuming both players pursue optimal strategies.82 CHAPTER 2. In Determinant Tic-Tac-Toe. . Deﬁne a sequence by a0 = 1. Show that the player who signs ﬁrst will always win by playing as well as possible. . Player 1 enters a 1 in an empty 3 × 3 matrix. . Show that. 9. for all integers n > 1. and thereafter the probability that she hits the next shot is equal to the proportion of shots she has hit so far. Fix an integer b ≥ 2. Consider a polyhedron with at least ﬁve faces such that exactly three edges emerge from each of its vertices. WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION 3.. and for each n ≥ 3. . Player 0 wins if the determinant is 0 and player 1 wins otherwise. . n} with the property that the average of the elements of S is an integer.. Let n ≥ 2 be an integer and Tn be the number of non-empty subsets S of {1. 1 2 1 3 2 6.

Let p be a prime number.) . 12. has been randomly chosen in the interval [1. A palindrome in base b is a positive integer whose base-b digits read the same backwards and forwards. 2002] with uniform probability. 11. you are informed whether n is higher or lower. After each incorrect guess. Show that you have a strategy so that the chance of winning is greater than 2/3. Your objective is to select n in an odd number of guesses. unknown to you. An integer n. 2002 83 10. c are integers.18. 2002 is a 4-digit palindrome in base 10. and you must guess an integer on your next turn among the numbers that are still feasibly correct. Prove that the determinant of the matrix x y z p p y zp x 2 2 p p p2 x y z is congruent modulo p to a product of polynomials of the form ax+by+cz. b. 63RD ANUAL WILLIAM LOWELL PUTNAM COMPETITION. for example. where a. Note that 200 is not a palindrome in base 10. (We say two integer polynomials are congruent modulo p if corresponding coeﬃcients are congruent modulo p. and 404 in base 7.2. but it is the 3-digit palindrome 242 in base 9. Prove that there is an integer which is a 3-digit palindrome in base b for at least 2002 diﬀerent values of b.

A5 = A2 . Suppose that An Cn+1 and Bn An+2 meet at Dn . Let A1 . and suppose that Cn is the midpoint of An Bn . Let S be a set consisting of m pairs (a. 3. A3 be three points in the plane. . and 3. . Calculate the ratio of the area of triangle D1 D2 D3 to the area of triangle E1 E2 E3 . . A2 . 4. let A4 = A1 . Let x1 . suppose that Bn is the midpoint of An An+1 . . For n = 1. Prove that the equation 6(6a2 + 3b2 + c2 ) = 5n2 has no solutions in integers except a = b = c = n = 0.1 1st Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. 2! 3! n! . and let Prove that Sn S2 S3 + +···+ . 2.Chapter 3 Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiads 3. b) of positive integers with the property that 1 ≤ a < b ≤ n. (1 + x1 )(1 + x2 ) · · · (1 + xn ) ≤ 1 + S + 2. 1989 S = x1 + x2 + · · · + x n . Show that there are at least (m − n ) 4 4m · 3n 84 2 1. x2 . and for convenience. xn be positive real numbers. and that An Bn+1 and Cn An+2 meet at En .

a2 . .2 2nd Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. b.) 3. where g(x) is the composition inverse function to f (x). . a2 . 2. For which of these triangles is the product of its altitudes a maximum? 4.3. a Prove that within each subset. and (b. 1990 triples (a. (a. 3. c) belong to S. (2) f (x) + g(x) = 2x for all real x. and let Sk be the sum of the products of a1 . every person has the same number of acquaintances. AB respectively and let G be the centroid of the triangle. and (c) For any two persons in a subset who do not know each other. . . Given triagnle ABC. . an be positive real numbers. 1990 1. how many non-similar triangles are there in which AEGF is a cyclic quadrilateral? 2. . c) such that (a. let D. n ≥ k 2 a1 a2 · · · an . . c). Determine all functions f from the reals to the reals for which (1) f (x) is strictly increasing. . .2. . 2N D ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD. (Note: f and g are said to be composition inverses if f (g(x)) = x and g(f (x)) = x for all real x. F be the midpoints of BC. n − 1. b). . A set of 1990 persons is divided into non-intersecting subsets in such a way that: (a) No one in a subset knows all the others in the subset. AC. b Determine the maximum possible number of subsets. Show that Sk Sn−k for k = 1. there are always at least two who do not know each other. 85 5. . Consider all the triangles ABC which have a ﬁxed base AB and whose altitude from C is a constant h. an taken k at a time. (b) Among any three persons in a subset. there is exactly one person in the same subset knowing both of them. E. For each value of ∠BAC. Let a1 .

. A triangle with sides a. b. 1992 1. . that is . then person B will know person A. Let X be on AB and Y on AC such that the points X. an acquaintance is someone who is known. bn be positive real numbers such that a1 +a2 +· · ·+an = b1 + b2 + · · · + bn . Suppose that XC and GB intersect at Q and Y B and GC intersect at P . and so on. b1 . Can you ﬁnd a special case with exactly 1991 red points? 3. . a2 . Construct with ruler and compass all the circles that are tangent to these two circles and pass through the point P . . show that there are at least 1991 red points in the plane.3 3rd Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. Show that for every integer n ≥ 6. Let G be the centroid of triangle ABC and M be the midpoint of BC. The teacher walks clockwise close to the children and hands out candies to some of them according to the following rule. Show that a2 a2 a2 a1 + a 2 + · · · + a n 1 2 n + +···+ ≥ a1 + b 1 a2 + b 2 an + b n 2 4. ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS Note: It is understood that if a person A knows person B. . Let a1 . all children will have at least one candy each. there exists a convex hexagon which can be dissected into exactly n congruent triangles. b2 . 5. He selects one child and gives him a candy. Y . 2. Show that triangle M P Q is similar to triangle ABC. then he skips the next child and gives a candy to the next one.4 4th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. If every two points are joined by a line segment with its midpoint coloured in red. and c is given. then he skips 2 and gives a candy to the next one. 3. 5. Denote by s the semiperimeter. 3. Suppose there are 997 points given in a plane. . then he skips 3. . . Every person is assumed to know one’s self. an . 1991 1. perhaps after many rounds. n children at school sit in a circle around their teacher to play a game. During a break. Determine the values of n for which eventually. Given are two tangent circles and a point P on their common tangent perpendicular to the lines joining their centres.86 CHAPTER 3. and G are collinear and XY and BC are parallel.

let us form all possible combinations. s − b. 4. 1993 87 s = a+b+c . . . iii no three of the h + s lines are concurrent. C2 be two circles with centres O1 . and s − c. Let ABCD be a quadrilateral such that all sides have equal length and angle ABC is 60 deg. Using each of these three numbers only once and using addition. This process is 2 repeated until a triangle can no longer be constructed with the side lengths given. . 3. √ (b) Let p be a prime number such that p ≤ n. Suppose that we choose three numbers from the set {1. and O2 A1 are concurrent. Construct a triangle with sides s − a.5. ii no two of them are parallel. 5.5 5th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. multiplication. r2 respectively. Determine all pairs (h. then thealues of these combinations are all distinct. Let E and F be the points of intersection of l with AB and BC respectively. .3. let C1 . Let l be a line passing through D and not intersecting the quadrilateral (except at D). then the number of regions formed by these h + s lines is 1992. and parenthesis. Find a sequence of maximal length consisting of non-zero integers in which the sum of any seven consecutive terms is positive and that of any eleven consecutive terms is negative. Let n be an integer such that n > 3. In a circle C with centre O and radius r. Prove that CA2 = CM · CE. 2. 5T H ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD. O1 A2 .Prove that the three lines OA. C2 are externally tangent to each other at A. O2 and radii r1 . . so that each circle Ci is internally tangent to C at Ai and so that C1 . n}. For which original triangles can this process be repeated indeﬁnitely? 2. 1993 1. (a) Show that if we choose all three numbers greater than n/2. 3. s) of positive integers with the following property: If one draws h horizontal lines and another s lines which satisfy: i they are not horizontal. Let M be the point of intersection of CE and AF . Show that the number of ways of choosing three numbers so that the smallest one is p and the values of the combinations are not all distinct is precisely the number of positive divisors of p − 1.

1993. y ∈ R. . Determine all positive integers n for which the equation xn + (2 + x)n + (2 − x)n = 0 has an integer as a solution. . 1. ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS 2. . . . 1). Let P1 . 1.88 CHAPTER 3.6 6th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. qy ) on the line segment joining Pi with Pi+1 such that both 2qx and 2qy are odd integers. Find the total number of diﬀerent integer values the function f (x) = [x] + [2x] + [ takes for real numbers x with 0 ≤ x ≤ 100. . Prove that for some i. |a0 |) and c = max(|cn+1 |. . . 3. . Let f (x) = an xn + an−1 xn−1 + · · · + a0 and g(x) = cn+1 xn+1 + cn xn + · · · + c0 5x ] + [3x] + [4x] 3 be non-zero polynomials with real coeﬃcients such that g(x) = (x + r)f (x) for some real number r. f (x) + f (y) + 1 ≥ f (x + y) ≥ f (x) + f (y) iii −f (−1) = f (1) = 1. . |c0 |). for i = 0. . 0 ≤ i ≤ 1992. . . 5. 1994 i For all x. ii there is no point other than Pi and Pi+1 on the line segment joining Pi with Pi+1 whose coordinates are both integers. . for i = 1. ii For all x ∈ [0. P2 . there exists a point Q with coordinates (qx . . c 4. f (0) ≥ f (x). . . If a = max(|an |. . prove that a ≤ n + 1. P1993 = P0 be distinct points in the xy-plane with the following properties: i both coordinates of Pi are integers. . . 3. 2. 1992. Let f : R → R be a function such that: .

an be a sequence of integers with values between 2 and 1995 such that: i Any two of the ai ’s are realtively prime. . . C 20 400 13000 . .7. 4. with circumcentre O.3. and circumradius R. and C. a1995 which satisfy: 2 an − (n − 1) ≥ an+1 − (n − 1). for n = 1. . a2 . You are given three lists A. . . 2. 3. Determine all sequences of real numbers a1 . Let n be an integer of the form a2 + b2 . . Prove that for every integer n > 1. then p divides ab. . . Determine the smallest possible values of n to make sure that the sequence will contain a prime number. and the distance between any two points is rational? 5. 1994. . . 3. . and √ 2 a1995 − 1994 ≥ a1 + 1. ii Each ai is either a prime or a product of primes. . with k any integer greater than or equal to 1. Is there an inﬁnite set of points in the plane such that no three points are collinear. . p ≤ n. 1995 Find all such functions f . prove that |OH| < 3R. Given a nondegenerate triangle ABC. 2. B. . . 7T H ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD. orthocentre H. 89 2. . Let a1 . List A contains the numbers of the form 10k in base 10. B 1010 1100100 1111101000 . . where a and b are relatively prime integers √ and such that if p is a prime. a2 . Lists B and C contain the same numbers translated into base 2 and 5 respectively: A 10 100 1000 . there is exactly one number in exactly one of the lists B or C that has exactly n digits. Determine all such n. 1995 1.7 7th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad.

M . Let AA and BB be perpendicular chords through S. 4. P2 . Let P QRS be a cyclic quadrilateral such that the segments P Q and RS are not parallel. P4 be four points on a circle. I4 are the vertices of a rectangle. with M ∈ AD. Let ABCD be a quadrilateral AB = BC = CD = DA. and SB N A. 7. N .8 8th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. (d) Each person must belong to one and only one group. Show that the perimeter of hexagon AM N CQP does not depend on the position of M N and P Q so long as the distance between them remains constant. Let m and n be positive integers such that n ≤ m. 2. . N ∈ DC. The National Marriage Council wishes to invite n couples to form 17 discussion groups under the following conditions: (a) All members of a group must be of the same sex. they are either all male or all female. P3 . and the set of circles through R and S. k} with the property that f (x) = f (y) whenever |x − y| ∈ {5.90 CHAPTER 3. 2. I3 . ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS 3. Prove that I1 . I2 be the incentre of the triangle P1 P3 P4 . 5. (b) The diﬀerence in the size of any two groups is 0 or 1. (c) All groups have at least 1 member. Let M N and P Q be two segments perpendicular to the diagonal BD and such that the distance between them is d > BD/2. . Consider the set of circles through P and Q. Find the set of all points M . 12}. Determine the set A of points of tangency of circles in these two sets. SBN A . Let C be a circle with radius R and centre O. Consider the rectangles SAM B. I2 . I4 be the incentre of the triangle P1 P2 P3 . and let I1 be the incentre of the triangle P2 P3 P4 . Prove that 2n n! ≤ (m + n)! ≤ (m2 + m)n (m − n)! 3. and N when A moves around the whole circle. . and Q ∈ BC. I3 be the incentre of the triangle P1 P2 P4 . P ∈ AB. 4.e. 3. . SA M B . Find the minimum positive integer k such that there exists a function f from the set Z of all integers to {1. Let P1 . 1996 1. i. and S a ﬁxed point in the interior of C.

9 9th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. . . Let a.e. A sequence of points is now deﬁned by the following iterative process. Prove that la lb lc + + ≥ 3. such that 2n + 2 n is also an integer. for which this is possible. then one and only one point P is interior to every triangle An−2 An−1 An . 5. 4. mb . Mb . 3.3. Justify your answer. and determine when equality occurs.9. 9T H ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD. mc are the lengths of the angle bisectors (internal to the triangle) and Ma . Prove that S > 1001. Triangle A1 A2 A3 has a right angle at A3 . Let ABC be a triangle inscribed in a circle and let la = mb mc ma . 1997 S =1+ 1 1+ 1 3 1. . lc = . b. where 100 ≤ n ≤ 1997. n ≥ 3. (a) Prove that if this process is continued indeﬁnitely. . n ≤ 1996. 2 2 sin A sin B sin2 C and that equality holds iﬀ ABC is an equilateral triangle. 91 3. Mc are the lengths of the angle bisectors extended until they meet the circle. 1996). 2. . k = n(n + 1)/2 for n = 1. Ma Mb Mc 1 + +···+ 1 6 1 1993006 where ma . c be the lengths of the sides of a triangle. 2. where n is a positive integer. a perpendicular line is drawn to meet An−2 An−1 at An+1 . Given + 1 1+ 1 3 + 1 6 +···+ 1+ 1 3 where the denominators contain partial sums of the sequence of reciprocals of triangular numbers (i. Prove that √ √ √ √ √ √ a+b−c+ b+c−a+ c+a−b≤ a+ b+ c . lb = . From An (n ≥ 3). 1997 Find all values of n. Find an integer n.

ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS (b) Let A1 and A3 be ﬁxed points. (Here An+1 means A1 and An means A0 . Let ABC be a triangle and D the foot of the altitude from A. . Show that for any positive integers a and b. 1998 1.. By considering all possible locations of A2 on the plane. . In order that each person has the same number of objects.92 CHAPTER 3. (36a + b)(a + 36b) can not be a power of 2. An . Prove that AN is perpendicular to N M . . each person Ai is to give or to receive a certain number of objects to or from its two neighbours Ai−1 and Ai+1 . . Let F be the set of all n−tuples (A1 . (n ≥ 3) are seated in a circle and that Ai has ai objects such that a1 + a2 + · · · + an = nN. ﬁnd the locus of P . 2. Let M and N be the midpoint of the segments BC and EF . √ Find the largest integer n such that n is divisible by all positive integers less than 3 n.. . .) How should this redistribution be performed so that the total number of objects transferred is minimum? 3. 1998}... Let |A| denote the number of elements of the set A. Let E and F lie on a line through D such that AE is perpendicular to BC. b.An )∈F |A1 ∪ · · · ∪ An | 2. .10 10th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. 5. and E and F are diﬀerent from D. Pruve that: 1+ a b 1+ b c 1+ c a+b+c ≥2 1+ √ 3 a abc 4. An ) such that each Ai is a subset of {1. Suppose that n people A1 . 5. respectively. AF is perpendicular to CF . . where N is a positive integer. 3. . Find: (A1 .. . c be positive real numbers. . Let a. A2 . .

2. n − 1 points in its interior and n − 1 points in its exterior.11 11th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. Determine all pairs (a. a2 . b) of integers with the property that the numbers a2 + 4b and b2 + 4a are both perfect squares. 2.3. 5. 4. 3. which is diﬀerent from P . A circle will be called good if it has 3 points of S on its circumference..12 12th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad. 11T H ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD. The tangent of Γ1 at P meets Γ2 at C. 3. . Let S be a set of 2n + 1 points in the plane such that no three are collinear and no four concyclic.11. and the extension of AP meets BC at R. . be a sequence of real numbers satisfying ai+j ≤ ai + aj for all i. Compute the sum S= for 2. . Let Γ1 and Γ2 be two circles intersecting at P and Q. . of Γ1 and Γ2 touches Γ1 at A and Γ2 at B. Prove that the circumcircle of triangle P QR is tangent to BP and BR. . Prove that a2 a3 an a1 + + +···+ ≥ an 2 3 n for each positive integer n. The common tangent. 1999 93 3. Find the smallest positive integer n with the following property: there does not exist an arithmetic progression of 1999 real numbers containing exactly n integers. Let a1 . closer to P . j = 1. Prove that the number of good circles has the same parity as n. Given the following triangular arrangement of circles: . 1999 1. 2000 x3 i 1 − 3xi + 3x2 i i=0 xi = i 101 101 1. .

94

CHAPTER 3. ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS

Each of the numbers 1, . . . , 9 is to be written into one of these circles, so that each circle contain exactly one of these numbers and: i the sum of the four numbers on each side of the triangle are equal; ii the sum of the squares of the four numbers on each side of the triangle are equal. Find all ways in which this can be done. 3. Let ABC be a triangle. Let M and N be the points in which the median and the angle bisector, respectively, at A meet the side BC. Let Q and P be the point in which the perpendicular at N to N A meets M A and BA, respectively, and O the point in which the perpendicular at P to BA meets AN produced. Prove that QO is perpendicular to BC. 4. Let n, k be given positive integers with n > k. Prove that n! 1 nn nn < · < n + 1 k k (n − k)n−k k! (n − k)! k k (n − k)n−k 5. Given a permutation (a0 , a1 , . . . , an ) of the sequence 0, 1, . . . , n. A transposition of ai with aj is called legal if ai = 0 for i > 0, and ai−1 + 1 = aj . The permutation (a0 , . . . , an ) is called regular if after a number of transpositions it becomes (1, 2, . . . , n, 0). For which numbers n is the permutation (1, n, n − 1, . . . , 3, 2, 0) regular?

3.13

13th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2001

1. For a positive integer n let S(n) be the sum of digits in the decimal representation of n. Any positive integer obtained by removing several (at least one) digits from the

3.14. 14T H ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD, 2002

95

right-hand end of the decimal representation of n is called a stump of n. Let T (n) be the sum of all stumps of n. Prove that n = S(n) + 9T (n). 2. Find the largest positive integer N so that the number of integers in the set {1, 2, . . . , N } which are divisible by 3 is equal to the number of integers which are divisible by 5 or 7 (or both). 3. Let two equal regular n-gons S and T be located in the plane such that their intersection is a 2n-gon (n ≥ 3). The sides of the polygon S are coloured in red and the sides of T in blue. Prove that the sum of the lengths of the blue sides of the polygon S ∩ T is equal to the sum of the lengths of its red sides. 4. A point in the plane with a cartesian coordinate system is called a mixed point if one of its coordinates is rational and the other one is irrational. Find all polynomials with real coeﬃcients such that their graphs do not contain any mixed point. 5. Find the greatest integer n, such that there are n+4 points A, B, C, D, X1 , . . . , Xn in the plane with AB = CD that satisfy the following condition: for each i = 1, 2, . . . , n triangles ABXi and CDXi are equal.

3.14

14th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2002

1. Let a1 , a2 , a3 , . . . , an be a sequence of non-negative integers, where n is a positive integer. Let a1 + a 2 + · · · + a n An = . n Prove that a1 !a2 ! . . . an ! ≥ ( An !)n , where An is the greatest integer less than or equal to An , and a! = 1 × 2 × · · · × a for a ≥ 1 (and 0! = 1). When does equality hold? 2. Find all positive integers a and b such that a2 + b b2 − a are both integers. 3. Let ABC be an equilateral triangle. Let P be a point on the side AC and Q be a point on the side AB so that both triangles ABP and ACQ are acute. Let R be and b2 + a a2 − b

96

CHAPTER 3. ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIADS the orthocentre of triangle ABP and S be the orthocentre of triangle ACQ. Let T be the point common to the segments BP and CQ. Find all possible values of CBP and BCQ such that triangle T RS is equilateral. 4. Let x, y, z be positive numbers such that 1 1 1 + + = 1. x y z Show that √ x + yz + √ √ √ √ √ √ y + zx + z + xy ≥ xyz + x + y + z.

5. Let R denote the set of all real numbers. Find all functions f from R to R satisfying: (i) there are only ﬁnitely many s in R such that f (s) = 0, and (ii) f (x4 + y) = x3 f (x) + f (f (y)) for all x, y in R.

3.15

**15th Asiatic Paciﬁc Mathematical Olympiad, 2003
**

p(x) = x8 − 4x7 + 7x6 + ax5 + bx4 + cx3 + dx2 + ex + f

1. Let a, b, c, d, e, f be real numbers such that the polynomial

factorises into eight linear factors x − xi , with xi > 0 for i = 1, 2, . . . , 8. Determine all possible values of f . 2. Suppose ABCD is a square piece of cardboard with side length a. On a plane are two parallel lines 1 and 2 , which are also a units apart. The square ABCD is placed on the plane so that sides AB and AD intersect 1 at E and F respectively. Also, sides CB and CD intersect 2 at G and H respectively. Let the perimeters of AEF and CGH be m1 and m2 respectively. Prove that no matter how the square was placed, m1 + m2 remains constant. 3. Let k ≥ 14 be an integer, and let pk be the largest prime number which is strictly less than k. You may assume that pk ≥ 3k/4. Let n be a composite integer. Prove: (a) if n = 2pk , then n does not divide (n − k)! ; (b) if n > 2pk , then n divides (n − k)! 4. Let a, b, c be the sides of a triangle, with a + b + c = 1, and let n ≥ 2 be an integer. Show that √ n √ √ √ 2 n n n n n an + b n + b + c n + c + a n < 1 + . 2

15. . 15T H ASIATIC PACIFIC MATHEMATICAL OLYMPIAD. Given two positive integers m and n. either there are 2m of them who form m pairs of mutually acquainted people or there are 2n of them forming n pairs of mutually unacquainted people.3. ﬁnd the smallest positive integer k such that among any k people. 2003 97 5.

- Australian Mathematical Olympiads 1996 2011 Book 2
- The William Lowell Putnam Mathematical Competition
- Math Olympiad Problems All Countries (1989 2009)
- MATHS olympiad
- Moscow Mathematical Olympiads
- IMO2011SL
- Balkan Mathematical Olympiad 2014
- Math Olympiad
- Mathematical Olympiads
- Math Olympiad All
- Math Olympiad Tutorials
- 144 Problems of the Austrian-Polish Mathematics Competition%2C 1978-1993
- A Friendly Mathematics Competition - 35 Years of Teamwork in Indiana
- Gator Mathematics Competition 2013 Tests and Solutions
- USAJMO math olympiad Solutions
- OlympiadCombinatoricsChapter1.pdf
- Good Books
- PROBLEMS OF OLYMPIADS ACROSS WORL
- TheNewMathleteProblemBook
- Hanoi Mathematical Society ======================
- 101 Problems in Algebra
- Mathematical Olympiad Problems (all countries 1989-2009).pdf
- Math Olympiad
- Mathematics Olympiad Problems
- Math Olympiad RMO,INMO,IMO books
- Math Problem Book II by KimY.li
- Andreescu and Harazi Note on Algebraic p
- The Contest Problem Book IX
- Maths Olympiad
- de thu va loi giai HOMC 2006 - 2016

Read Free for 30 Days

Cancel anytime.

Close Dialog## Are you sure?

This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

Loading